JP6647567B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning-type gaming machine and a ball-and-ball gaming machine.

  In a game hall such as a pachinko hall, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged and efficiently accommodated by a facility for collecting gaming machines called island facilities. As game machines installed in a game arcade, a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning-type game machine (slot machine) are known. The floor of the amusement arcade is divided by a plurality of island facilities so that visitors and employees can walk, and a sufficient space for players to play games is secured. Related equipment such as a ball lending machine or a medal lending machine is provided in the island facility adjacent to the gaming machine for the convenience of the player. The plurality of gaming machines arranged in the island facilities are connected to hall computers that monitor the use (eg, insertion) of gaming media to the gaming machines, the payout of gaming machines, and specific gaming states. The hall computer counts, for each island facility, the use (e.g., input) of a game medium to the gaming machine, the payout paid out from the gaming machine, the number of times a specific gaming state has been achieved, and the like. As a result, it is possible to grasp what kind of gaming state the gaming machine installed in the island facility has changed, and to know whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

  In order to transmit to the hall computer the use of gaming media (such as insertion) into the gaming machine, the payout paid out from the gaming machine, the number of times a particular gaming state has been achieved, an abnormal signal of the gaming machine, etc. A device provided with a concentrated terminal plate has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1). In Patent Literature 1, a security signal obtained by synthesizing a plurality of error signals is output to a hall computer from one of the terminals of an output connector provided in a centralized terminal board. It is disclosed that many types of information can be transmitted to the hall computer, in other words, more than the number of signal lines to the hall computer. However, the security signal does not transmit the type of information.

  Further, a gaming machine for transmitting information to an external test device has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 2). Patent Document 2 discloses that an identification bit is provided separately from an information bit, the type of information related to the information bit is set in the identification bit, and the identification bit is transmitted to an external test device together with the information bit.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-85148 (abstract, paragraphs 0013, 0115, 0130) JP 2013-230238 A (Summary, Claim 1)

  However, Patent Document 1 describes an external output function used in a gaming machine, and does not transmit the type of information when transmitting a signal obtained by combining a plurality of pieces of information to a hall computer. Therefore, the external device cannot determine which information has been sent.

  When an identification bit is transmitted as described in Patent Document 2, it is necessary to newly store data relating to the type of information to be set in the identification bit, and it is necessary to transmit the identification bit in addition to the information bit. Therefore, there arises a problem that the storage capacity increases and the transmission processing load increases.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can transmit more types of information than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load. .

In order to achieve the above object, one gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine, wherein a signal generating means for generating a signal to be output to the outside and a signal generated by the signal generating means are output to the outside. A signal output circuit, wherein the signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal composed of a square wave corresponding to the first information, and a square wave corresponding to the second information different from the first information. And a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information, wherein the signal output circuit comprises: A first signal line for outputting the first signal generated corresponding to the first information to the outside, and a second signal line for outputting the second signal generated corresponding to the second information to the outside. 2 signal lines, wherein the gaming machine is connected to the first signal lines. The second signal line is configured not to output the second signal during a first period from the rise or fall of the first signal, and the third information is output from the second signal line during the first period. The first signal and the second information are configured so as to be able to output the third signal generated in accordance with the first information and the second information. It is characterized by being information . According to this configuration, the second signal is not output from the second signal line during the first period from the rise or fall of the first signal on the first signal line, and the second signal is output from the second signal line. The third signal is output using the first period during which no is output. Therefore, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load to the gaming machine. In addition, since the insertion and the payout of the game medium do not occur at the same time, the existing signal line can be effectively used by using the combination of the insertion and the payout of the game medium.

  In addition, the first signal is defined as one unit of one High level period and one Low level period with respect to the number of game media inserted or paid out, and the first signal is generated by repeating the signal related to the one unit a plurality of times. And the third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line includes an m-th time in the plurality of repetitions and an n-th time different from the m-th time. Then, they may be different types of information. According to this configuration, the number of repetitions of the plurality of repetitions of the first signal is used for the determination of the type of the third information, so that more various types of third information can be used using one signal line. Can be output effectively.

Further, another gaming machine according to the present invention, in the gaming machine, comprises a signal generating means for generating a signal to be output to the outside, and a signal output circuit for outputting the signal generated by the signal generating means to the outside, The signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal formed of a square wave corresponding to first information, and a second signal formed of a square wave corresponding to second information different from the first information. And a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information, wherein the signal output circuit corresponds to the first information. A first signal line for outputting the generated first signal to the outside, and a second signal line for outputting the second signal generated corresponding to the second information to the outside, The gaming machine may be configured such that the rising of the first signal on the first signal line is Alternatively, the first period from the fall is configured such that the second signal is not output from the second signal line, and the second signal is generated from the second signal line in response to the third information in the first period. The third signal is configured to be able to be output, and the signal generation unit further corresponds to the fourth information different from any of the first information, the second information, and the third information as the signal. To generate a fourth signal composed of a square wave, and the gaming machine outputs the first signal from the first signal line during a second period from a rise or a fall of the second signal on the second signal line. A signal is not output, and the fourth signal generated corresponding to the fourth information is output from the first signal line in the second period . . According to this configuration, the second signal is not output from the second signal line during the first period from the rising or falling of the first signal on the first signal line, and the second signal is output from the second signal line. The third signal is output using the first period during which no is output. Therefore, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load to the gaming machine. Further, during the second period from the rise or fall of the second signal in the second signal line, the first signal is not output from the first signal line, and the first signal is output from the first signal line. The fourth signal is output using the second period that does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines.

Still another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine, comprising: a signal generating means for generating a signal to be output to the outside; and a signal output circuit for outputting a signal generated by the signal generating means to the outside. The signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal formed of a square wave corresponding to the first information, and a second signal formed of a square wave corresponding to the second information different from the first information. A signal and a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information, wherein the signal output circuit corresponds to the first information. A first signal line for outputting the generated first signal to the outside, and a second signal line for outputting the second signal generated corresponding to the second information to the outside. , The gaming machine sets the first signal on the first signal line. The second signal line is configured not to output the second signal during the first period from the rising edge or the falling edge, and is generated in accordance with the third information from the second signal line during the first period. The gaming machine is configured to output the third signal from the second signal for a predetermined time before the rising or falling of the first signal on the first signal line. The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line is configured to be output from the second signal line, and the third information may be from the rising or falling of the third signal to the rising or falling of the first signal. It is characterized by different types of information depending on the length of time up to . According to this configuration, the second signal is not output from the second signal line during the first period from the rising or falling of the first signal on the first signal line, and the second signal is output from the second signal line. The third signal is output using the first period during which no is output. Therefore, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load to the gaming machine. Further, by using the time length from the rise or fall of the third signal to the rise or fall of the first signal in the determination of the type of the third information, more various types of third information can be combined into one. Effective output can be achieved using the signal line.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of reels of the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is an external view illustrating an arrangement state of a main control board in FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a main control board of FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating functions of a main control board and a sub control board in FIG. 3. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the combination of 1st Embodiment and a reel symbol, and the payout number of medals. It is a figure showing the relation between the winning combination lottery result and the command of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage contents of a game information storage unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data according to the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a display method of a ratio indicator in a 1st embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a display method of a ratio indicator in a 1st embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a display method of a ratio indicator in a 1st embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method regarding the error of the payout indicator in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a power-on process according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RWM backup failure determination processing (step S3) of FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a power-on initialization process (step S4) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (step S7) of FIG. The error processing of FIG. 15 (step S9), the error processing of FIG. 22 (step S233), the error processing of FIG. 23 (step S254), the error processing of FIG. 29 (step S411), and the error processing of FIG. 30 (step S441) It is a flowchart shown. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process according to the first embodiment. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an overflow error determination process (step S201) of FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a reel error determination process (step S208) of FIG. 21. It is a flowchart which shows the game information totalization process (step S211) of FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the 400 update process (steps S271, S273, S276) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process (steps S278, S280) of FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, S287) of FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the cumulative update (steps S289, S290, S291) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (step S212) of FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. 31 is a flowchart showing a power interruption process (step S434) of FIG. 30. 31 is a flowchart showing an external signal output process (step S446) of FIG. 30. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an outside-of-use-area interrupt process (step S437) of FIG. 30. 34 is a flowchart showing a selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing a selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing a selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) of FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) of FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a door monitoring process (step S533) of FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a ratio display-related timer update process (step S534) in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing each ratio calculation (step S535) of FIG. 33. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 41. 43 is a flowchart showing a 100-fold process (step S702) of FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a shift process (steps S708 and S709) of FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process (step S711) of FIG. 42. 34 is a flowchart showing each ratio display setting (step S536) in FIG. 33. Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the ratio display data acquisition (step S773) of Fig. 46. It is a flowchart which shows the display data acquisition process (step S809, S810) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sub error notification processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of a ratio calculation process performed by the calculation unit in FIG. 6. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the display of the ratio display, the display of the payout display, and the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the display of the ratio indicator, the display of the payout indicator, and other relationships with the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the modification of the relation with the display of the ratio indicator, the display of the payout indicator, and the state of the main CPU according to the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of the ratio display in the modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a schematic view of a cross section taken along the line AA of the main control board of FIG. 5 and a comparative example between the conventional example and the first embodiment when an unauthorized member is inserted. FIG. 6 is a more detailed schematic diagram of the main control board of FIG. 5. 64 is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the main control board of FIG. 63 and a comparative example of the conventional example when an illegal IC is mounted and the wiring of the main control board of the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of a modification of the wiring of the main control board in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of a modification of the wiring of the main control board in FIG. 63 and a comparative example of the wiring of the main control board according to the modification of the first embodiment with the conventional example when an unauthorized IC is mounted. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of output contents of an external central terminal board of FIG. 3. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the external concentrated terminal plate of FIG. 3. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart for explaining a relationship between signal outputs of two signal lines of the external central terminal plate of FIG. 3 in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart for explaining a relationship between signal outputs of two signal lines of the external central terminal plate of FIG. 3 in one modified example. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart for explaining a relationship between signal outputs of two signal lines of the external concentrated terminal plate of FIG. 3 in another modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating storage contents of a game information storage unit in FIG. 6 in a ball game machine (pachinko game machine) according to a second embodiment. It is an explanatory view of a display method of a ratio indicator in a 1st embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a spinning-type gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a slot machine), which is a gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

(Constitution)
An outline of the configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the front opening of the housing 3 is openably and closably closed by a front door 5, and an operation plate 7 is provided at a position substantially at the center of the front door 5. A front plate 9 is provided above the front panel. The front plate 9 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular display window 11, and inside the display window 11, as shown in FIG. 4, a rotating reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a predetermined order. Left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged. The left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R form a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols. Each forms one variable display column.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R include a plurality of types of symbols including, for example, "7", "BAR", "Bell", "Cherry", "R1", and "R2". A total of 21 pieces are provided in a predetermined arrangement. In FIG. 2, for simplicity of explanation, only symbols of reels necessary for explanation of the present embodiment are shown.

  In addition, frame numbers from 0 to 20 are sequentially assigned to the respective symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. For example, symbols from frame numbers 0 to 20 are printed. A reel tape is stuck on the peripheral surface of the reel to form left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. When the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate, a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed on the display window 11 in a predetermined order of frame numbers 20, 19,..., 0, 20,. Variable display.

  When the rotation of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is stopped, a total of nine symbols, three for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, peek from the display window 11. Specifically, three reels, one each for the upper, middle, and lower tiers, and a total of nine reels for the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are displayed through the display window 11 for each reel. That is, when all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop, a total of nine symbols arranged in three columns and three rows are stopped and displayed on the display window 11, and the upper and middle reels are displayed. If one line in the middle row of the three horizontal rows and the two diagonal rows in the lower row becomes a winning line described later, and the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop in a state where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, It will be a prize.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3, left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R each including a stepping motor are connected to each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. -The middle and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are independently driven to rotate.

  Returning to FIG. 1, the operation plate 7 has a bet switch 15 for instructing the insertion of medals one by one from credit medals stored therein, and a predetermined number of medals per game (game) from credit medals. A maximum bet switch 17 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number of inserted medals (set to 3), a lever-shaped start switch 19 for rotating each of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R to start variable display of each symbol. Left, center, and right stops corresponding to the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively, in order to stop the rotation of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to stop the variable display of each symbol. Switches 21L, 21M, 21R, a settlement switch 23 for paying out a credit medal, and a medal slot 25 are provided. In this embodiment, it is assumed that one type of three medals is set as the number of medal insertions (specified number) required for one game.

  In addition, at the approximate center of the upper part of the front plate 9, a moving image or the like is displayed to notify the player of a winning or a prize, and a left / middle / right stop switch 21L, 21M, 21R required to win the prize. A liquid crystal display 27 for performing an effect of notifying an operation mode is provided. Immediately above the liquid crystal display 27, an explanation panel 29 on which various winning symbols are displayed is provided. Speakers 31L and 31R for performing effects such as music and voice are provided on the left and right sides of the explanation panel 29, respectively. Note that speakers 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of a medal payout port 39 described later.

  Further, a central lamp portion 33M is provided on the upper side of the explanation panel 29 and the speakers 31L and 31R, and left and right lamp portions 33L and 33R are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. A light source such as a light emitting diode is disposed in each of the center, left, and right lamp units 33M, 33L, and 33R. These center / left / right ramps 33M, 33L, 33R are integrally formed and constitute an upper ramp 33 for performing an effect such as notifying a player of winning or winning.

  A lower panel 35 on which a decorative image or the like is displayed is provided below the operation plate 7. On the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, a lower lamp unit in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, for example, in two rows. 37L and 37R are provided. Below the lower panel 35, a medal payout port 39 and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port 39 are provided. Also, a pay line is drawn on the front panel 9, and a credit display for displaying the number of credit medals stored is received in the lower left corner of the front panel 9 by display control by the CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 in FIG. And a payout display 46 for displaying the number of payout medals. The credit indicator 45 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and is capable of displaying a 2-digit stored number (up to 50). The payout indicator 46 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and can display a 2-digit payout number. The seven-segment display has a total of eight segments formed by combining a bar-shaped seven-segment arranged in the shape of "8" and a small round segment serving as a decimal point. Each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 10). Here, the payout indicator 46 is also used to display an error code corresponding to the error that has occurred, and the tens and / or ones dots of the payout indicator 46 (the illuminable points DP in FIG. 10) are Also used as the advantageous section lamp 47 (see FIG. 3), lighting indicates an advantageous section and extinguishing indicates that it is not an advantageous section. Note that the advantageous section lamp may be configured as a separate component from the payout indicator 46, for example, the dot portion of the credit indicator 45 may be used, or another lamp member may be used.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 4, a support frame 13 that supports the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is fixed to a rear wall in the housing 3. Below the support frame 13 in the housing 3, a hopper unit 43 for discharging medals to a medal payout port 39 is provided. Further, on the back side near the medal slot 25, as shown in FIG. 4, it is determined whether or not the medal inserted into the medal slot 25 is a regular one, and only the regular medal is transmitted to the hopper unit 43. A guiding medal selector 48 is provided. Note that a medal passage (not shown) is provided inside the housing 3, and medals excluded as irregular medals by the medal selector 48 and medals paid out from the hopper unit 43 pass through the medal passage. Payout from the medal payout exit 39. Specifically, in the medal selector 48, although not particularly shown, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 is stored in the hopper unit 43 by operating the rail unit by driving the cancel coil using the electromagnet. The passage and the passage for proceeding from the medal payout port 39 to the medal receiver 41 are formed so as to be switchable. Thereby, it is possible to switch between storing the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 as credit medals or paying out to the medal receiver 41. However, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum stored number or during a game, the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is discharged to the medal payout port 39 without operating the rail unit by driving the cancel coil. In other cases, the rail portion operates by the driving of the cancel coil under the drive control of the main CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. Then, only the regular medals are guided to the hopper unit 43.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an insertion sensor 53 is provided in a medal selector 48 near the medal insertion slot 25 inside the housing 3, and the insertion sensor 53 detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 one by one. . The insertion sensor 53 is formed by providing three selector sensors A, B, and C in a medal passage. The inserted medals are arranged in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B. And a predetermined range of time intervals (timing). A payout sensor 54 is provided at the exit of the hopper unit 43, and the payout sensor 54 detects medals to be paid out to the medal payout port 39 one by one. The payout sensor 54 includes a payout sensor A and a payout sensor B that are arranged at a predetermined distance. In the timing chart at the time of medal passing in a normal state, both the payout sensors A and B can shift to the on state when the hopper motor 57 is being driven (on state). Further, the payout sensor B is set to shift twice from the off state to the on state. When the payout sensor B is in the first on state, the payout sensor A shifts from the off state to the on state. In the second ON state of B, the dispensing sensor A is set so as to shift from the ON state to the OFF state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an operation box 50 is provided, and a power switch 50a for switching power ON and OFF, a key cylinder type setting change key switch 50b, and a push button type setting change button 50c are provided. ing. The setting change is performed by setting a winning probability set value (set from setting 1) to be used when selecting one of a plurality of lottery tables 671 (see FIG. 6) having different degrees of advantage at the time of winning lottery. This is a process for setting 6).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a set value display 56 is provided. The set value display 56 is constituted by, for example, one 7-segment display, and a set value of one digit winning probability (specifically, , 1 to 6). The seven-segment display has a total of eight segments formed by combining a bar-shaped seven-segment arranged in the shape of “8” and one small round segment serving as a decimal point. Each segment is composed of a light emitting diode (see FIG. 10). The set value display 56 displays the set value of the slot machine 1. The set value display 56 is provided inside the housing 3, specifically, on the back of the front door 5, so as not to be visible from the outside. After setting the set value, the display is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a door sensor (door opening / closing switch) 58 is provided. The door sensor 58 is provided on the housing 3 side and determines whether the front door 5 is closed. It is a sensor for detecting whether or not. For example, when the front door 5 is closed, the door sensor 58 is turned on (ON state) by the contact sensor when the rear surface of the front door 5 and the front surface of the door sensor 58 come close to each other. As the door is opened, the back surface of the front door 5 is separated from the front surface of the door sensor 58, and is turned off (OFF state) by the contact sensor. Of course, the present invention is not limited to the contact sensor, and the opening and closing of the front door 5 may be detected by an optical sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 3, left, center, and right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R that detect the rotational positions of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are provided. The sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R include, for example, photo interrupters that detect protrusions provided on the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively. When the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate, The protruding portion is detected for each rotation, and a detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63. In the present embodiment, for example, when the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R detect the protrusions, the design with the frame number 20 is located in the middle of the display window 11, respectively.

  The hopper motor 57 shown in FIG. 3 is disposed in the hopper unit 43 and pays out medals toward the medal payout port 39 by driving the hopper motor 57. The overflow sensor 57a is provided in the vicinity of an auxiliary tank for storing medals overflowing from the medal tank for storing medals of the hopper unit 43. The overflow sensor 57a detects that the medals in the auxiliary tank are full. It outputs a signal to the main CPU 61 of the control board 63.

  Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 59 is provided inside the housing 3. The external centralized terminal board 59 outputs game data to the outside of the slot machine 1, and includes connection terminals (connectors) (input connectors 59i in FIG. 68) wired to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63, and FIG. A terminal board provided with a connection terminal (connector) (output connector 59o in FIG. 68) that is connected to an external device (not shown) via some terminals of connectors CN1 to CN4 mounted on the main control board 63. is there. Although not shown, the external centralized terminal board 59 is connected to a game island facility (for example, a data display) or a hall computer. The details of the configuration of the external centralized terminal plate 59 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 63 on which a main CPU 61 for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, and effects control in accordance with the progress of the game based on information transmitted from the main control board 63 are performed. The sub-control board 73 on which the sub-CPU 71 is mounted is separately provided, and various data are transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub-control board 73 in one direction. In addition, the main control board 63 is housed in a board case so as to prevent unauthorized access from the outside, and is tightly sealed so that the board case cannot be opened without leaving any trace. I have. In addition, various measures have been taken on the board case so that the unauthorized release can be visually recognized with certainty.

  An RWM (read / write memory) 65 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61 and temporarily stores data related to a game such as a game state of the slot machine 1. The ROM 67 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61 and stores a game machine program (a program for the slot machine 1) including preset data.

  By the way, the ROM 67 has a capacity of, for example, 16 KB (kilobytes), and a 7.5 KB area (program area 4.5 KB + data area 3 KB) starting from the address 0000H stores programs relating to the progress of the game and various tables 671, 672, Used to store required data. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the area of 4.35 KB of the remaining 8.5 KB starting from address 1E50H of the ROM 67, the total number of paid out medals per 400 games is monitored in order to monitor the payout history of medals. Are used to store a game information monitoring program and data, such as the total number of medals paid out in the last 6000 games, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after RWM clear, for the 15 sets.

  The RWM 65 has a capacity of 1024 B (bytes), and an area of 512 B starting from the address F000H is used for temporarily storing various data necessary for executing a program relating to the progress of the game. Further, as will be described in detail later, in order to monitor the medal game history in the unused area of the remaining 512B starting from the address F200H of the RWM 65, 15 sets of the total payout number of medals for every 400 games are monitored. Various data (see FIG. 9) relating to game information, such as the total number of medals paid out in the 6000 game, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after RWM clear, are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 (the component mounting surface of the main control board 63), a ratio display (composition monitor) composed of a plurality of display elements composed of light emitting diodes. (Corresponding to “display”) 69 are provided. As shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63 in a board case installed inside the housing 3 and above the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Then, when the front door 5 is opened, it is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized from the outside. As shown in FIG. 5, the ratio display 69 includes four seven-segment displays. The seven-segment display is formed in a bar shape and has seven segments arranged in a “8” shape. , A total of eight segments combined with one small round segment serving as a decimal point, and each segment is constituted by a light emitting diode. Switch control is performed by the main CPU 61 to control turning on and off of the light emitting diode, and VDD and GND are supplied to at least one of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting diode via a switch. In FIG. 5, CS is a transparent resin substrate case housing the main control substrate 63, K is a caulking portion for sealing the substrate case CS, and CN is a connector. The arrangement of components (connector, ratio display, main CPU, IC, etc.) in FIG. 5 will be described later in detail.

  Further, the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and executes a game machine program stored in the ROM 67 to perform processing relating to the progress of the game. Then, the main CPU 61 stores data on the result of the lottery in the lottery process by the later-described lottery means 103, data on the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the start switch 19, etc. operated by the player. Are transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) in a command format.

  The sub-control board 73 includes a memory 75 having an RWM section for temporarily storing various data and a ROM section for storing various programs for production. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and the sub CPU 71 transmits various data regarding the slot machine 1 transmitted from the main CPU 61 (in the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 described later). By executing a program stored in the memory 75 based on the role lottery result, data on whether operating devices such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R and the start switch 19 have been operated, the game is executed. Determine the contents of the production related to the game to be offered to the player. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 controls the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 27 and the speakers 31L and 31R via the I / O port of the sub control board 73 based on the determined effect. I do.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 63 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 63 has various functions realized by executing a program stored in the ROM 67 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. .

(1) Game control means 100
The game control means 100 of FIG. 6 controls the game of the slot machine 1 and executes a normal game which is a general game and a special game which is a game more advantageous to the player than the normal game. As shown in FIG. 2, the game device includes an operation mode determination unit 100a and a game state setting unit 100b.

a) Operation mode determination means 100a
The operation mode determination unit 100a in FIG. 6 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the slot machine 1 or a mode such as long pressing. Specifically, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, the left Various operations on the slot machine 1 by the player, such as the mode of operation of various switches such as the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R by the player, and the mode of operation of inserting a medal into the medal slot 25 by the player. Is determined.

b) Game state setting means 100b
The game state setting means 100b in FIG. 6 is a symbol determination means for determining the result of the lottery processing by the role lottery means 103 described later and the display mode of the symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R displayed on the display window 11. The game state of the slot machine 1 is set to one of a plurality of game states set in advance based on the result of the determination made by the game machine 109 or the like.

  Specifically, in the normal game state in which the normal game is executed, a predetermined special combination (BB, CB) is won (if "7-7-7" is arranged on the winning line, a BB winning is achieved, and "7-7-7" is displayed on the winning line). When "BAR-BAR-BAR" is completed, when the CB wins), the gaming state setting means 100b sets the gaming state of the slot machine 1 to a special gaming state in which a special game is executed. In the special game state, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of games (games) are executed, and the special game end condition is satisfied, the special game is terminated and the slot machine is terminated. The first game state is set to the normal game state by the game state setting means 100b.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, when the special role is not won even though the special role is won, that is, each symbol corresponding to the special role is set to one line in the middle row of the display window 11. If the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are not stopped so as to be displayed on the line (center line), the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is changed to the internal winning where the internal winning game is executed. The middle game state is set by the game state setting means 100b. Further, in the gaming state during the internal winning, by winning a special combination carried over without winning, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is set to the special gaming state by the gaming state setting means 100b.

  Here, an outline of a game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 executes a game by inserting three medals, and the insertion sensor 53, the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 causes the three medals to be inserted into the slot machine 1. When the insertion is detected, a winning line (center line) in the middle of the display window 11 becomes valid. Then, when the operation of the start switch 19 is detected on condition that three medals, which are the specified number, are inserted, any one of the preset lottery results is determined by lottery processing using random numbers. 103. In addition, all the rotations of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are started, and the symbols of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R displayed on the display window 11 are displayed on the left, center and right reels 13L and 13R. The determination starts in accordance with the rotation angles of 13M and 13R.

  Thereafter, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are accelerated to a state where all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R can be effectively received. After the operation of all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is enabled, for example, when it is detected that the left stop switch 21L has been operated, the left reel 13L is stopped, and the middle stop switch 21M is operated. When it is detected that the right reel switch 13R is operated, the middle reel 13M is stopped, and when it is detected that the right stop switch 21R is operated, the right reel 13R is stopped. Thus, the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R stops the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R corresponding to the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. I do.

  When all the operations of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are completed, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped. At this time, when the symbol of the predetermined winning combination determined by the role lottery means 103 stops at a predetermined position on the winning line in the middle stage of the display window 11 that has become effective, a winning is achieved, and the number of medals according to the winning mode is obtained. Is credited or paid out from the medal payout exit 39, and one game ends. In addition, a predetermined profit may be given to the player instead of or together with the payout of the medal.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, as special roles, special roles (bonus: BB, CB), small roles (middle bell, single sheet 1-12, middle cherry), replaying roles (replays 1-8) Is set in advance. In the present embodiment, different combinations (“middle bell”, “single-piece combination 1” to “single-piece combination 12”, “replay 1” to “replay 8”) can be arranged as the combination lottery result depending on the operation mode. There is a possibility of winning multiple potential wins (winning role group: left bell, middle bell, right bell, replay). The role lottery results of the role lottery means 103 include a special role winning (bonus winning), a small role winning, a replay winning (replay winning), and a loss.

  In addition, the prize includes a special role prize (bonus prize) related to the transition to a special game (bonus game), a small role prize related to the payout of medals, and a replay game prize related to execution of a replay (replay). Replay winning).

  Then, for example, when three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the pay line in each of the display modes related to the roles "BB" and "CB" in FIG. , A bonus game (special game) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, there is no medal payout due to the special role winning (the number of special payouts of the special role is 0), and the game is shifted to the bonus game after the game in which the winning mode related to the special role is established. Alternatively, a predetermined number of payouts (for example, 10) may be set for the special combination, and the game may be shifted to the bonus game after paying out medals.

  In addition, for example, in each of the display modes related to the combination of “Middle Bell”, “Single Role 1” to “Single Role 12”, and “Middle Cherry” in FIG. When three pieces are arranged on the winning line in the middle of the display window 11, a small winning combination is won, and medals of the number shown in the column of "number of paid out" are paid out.

  Further, in FIG. 7, “any” used as a display mode related to the winning of the role “middle cherry” may have any of the symbols provided on the middle reel 13M and the right reel 13R arranged on the winning line. Means that.

  In addition, when three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the pay line in the display mode related to the roles "Replay 1" to "Replay 8" in FIG. The player can play the game again under the same conditions as the previous game without inserting a new medal.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that a plurality of wins can be simultaneously won by the win lottery means 103. In other words, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning combination group (combination lottery result) composed of a plurality of combinations is formed, and the combination lottery means 103 determines whether or not each winning combination group has been won. Among the winning role groups, the winning role groups "Left Bell", "Middle Bell" and "Right Bell" (hereafter, when the winning role groups "Left Bell", "Middle Bell" and "Right Bell" are collectively referred to as "Bell Group" Each of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “center bell”, and “right bell” may be referred to as “specific set winning”.), Each of which includes a plurality of winning combinations. Specifically, the winning combination group “Left Bell” is composed of “Middle Bell”, “One-Piece Role 1” to “One-Piece Role 4”, and the winning role group “Middle Bell” is “Middle Bell”, “One Bell Role”. The winning combination group “Right Bell” is composed of “Middle Bell”, “Single Combination 9” to “Single Combination 12”.

  Therefore, if it is determined that the winning lottery means 103 described later has won the winning role group "Left Bell", it means that "Middle Bell", "Single Role 1" to "Single Role 4" have been simultaneously won. If it is determined that the winning role group "Medium Bell" has been won, it means that "Middle Bell", "Single Role 5" to "Single Role 8" have been simultaneously won, and the winning role group "Right Bell" has been selected. If it is determined that the winning has been achieved, it means that the "middle bell", the "single piece 9" to the "single piece 12" have been simultaneously won.

  In the present embodiment, the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” each have an operation mode (push order) of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R that are advantageous to the player. ) Are set in advance, and as shown in the column of “Remarks” in FIG. 8, even if the role lottery result by the role lottery means 103 (winning role group) is the same, the player is left, middle, and The stop control means 106 controls the stop of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that the winning mode (display mode) differs depending on the order in which the right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated. Is configured.

  That is, by winning one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” shown in FIG. 8, when a plurality of roles are simultaneously won, the left / middle / right stop switch is set. The stop control means 106 is configured such that, among the winning combinations, the combination for preferentially aligning the symbol related to the winning on the winning line differs according to the operation order of 21L, 21M, 21R.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, for example, when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 103 is a winning combination group “left bell”, the operation mode determining means 100a firstly causes the left stop switch 21L to be operated. Is determined to have been performed, the symbol "Bell" which is a display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" which is most advantageous to the player is displayed in a state where the symbol is aligned on the winning line. Then, the left, middle and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are controlled to be stopped by the stop control means 106.

  On the other hand, when the operation mode determination means 100a first determines that the left stop switch 21L has not been operated, the symbol "Bell" which is a display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" is aligned on the winning line. The symbol is not displayed in the state in which it is in the closed state. That is, when the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated in a preset operation order corresponding to the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”), the operation mode is determined. Unless the determination is made by the determination means 100a, the symbols are not displayed in the display mode corresponding to the winning combination that is most advantageous for the players included in the winning combination group.

  By the way, the special game (bonus game) is a game in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than that of the normal game, and is a game that is easy to receive game medals and is advantageous to the player compared to the normal game. Yes, this is a game in which the player can get more medals.

  When the special game state is entered by winning the special combination “BB” in FIG. 7, a big bonus game is executed. In the big bonus game, a regular bonus game is continuously executed. In the regular bonus game, the lottery table 671 that defines the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is determined from the normal game lottery table selected in the normal game by the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 of the normal game. By switching to the special game lottery table defined with a higher probability than in the case, the winning probability of the small role is set to be higher than during the normal game. As a result, the special game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Then, after shifting to the regular bonus game, if the game is played a preset number of times, for example, seven times, the regular bonus game ends. Then, after shifting to the big bonus game, when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the big bonus game ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the big bonus game is set to end the special game (big bonus game) and shift to the normal game when the number of paid-out medals in the big bonus game reaches a predetermined upper limit number. ing.

  In addition, when the game shifts to the special game state by winning the special combination “CB” in FIG. 7, a challenge bonus game is executed. In the challenge bonus game, all the roles are won, and the state where the left reel pull-in range is smaller than usual continues until the payout number reaches the specified number. Then, after shifting to the challenge bonus game, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the challenge bonus game ends.

  When the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103 is a special role winning (BB, CB), the stop control of the symbols based on the special role winning is performed. At this time, the symbol arrangement of the winning pattern of the special role is allocated. If not, the game state shifts to the gaming state during the internal winning, and the special role winning is carried over until the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special role is allocated.

  On the other hand, if the small lottery result is a small lottery winning game and the symbol arrangement of the winning combination of the small role is not allocated to the game, the small lottery result is not carried over to the next game. Also, in the case of a replay winning, a symbol related to any one of “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” always wins, regardless of the timing at which the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. Since the symbols are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so as to be aligned on the line, the player always wins the re-game combination.

  By the way, when any of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” are won, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L and 21M are at any timing similar to the symbol related to the replay. , 21R are operated so that the symbols ("Bell", "R1", "R2") related to the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" are always aligned on the winning line. Since the symbols of the right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged, the player always wins any one of the "middle bell", the "single piece 1" to the "single piece 12". That is, if one of the winning combination groups “Left Bell”, “Middle Bell”, and “Right Bell” is won and the left / middle / right stop switch 21L, 21M, 21R is operated, the left / middle / right stop is performed. Regardless of the timing at which the switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols related to the winning (see FIG. 7) associated with the respective operation modes are aligned on the winning line so that the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are controlled to be stopped by the stop control means 106.

  In the present embodiment, an AT (assist time) period starts from the next game after the game winning the "middle cherry" and the AT game is executed. In the AT game, when one of “left bell”, “middle bell” and “right bell” is won, an operation mode (any stop switch is operated first) according to the type of the winning combination group (specific set winning). Is notified to the player. Then, after shifting to the AT period, the AT period ends when a predetermined number of times, for example, 20 AT games are played.

(2) Setting control means 101
The setting control means 101 in FIG. 6 sets a set value (setting 1 to setting 6). This set value is for selecting a lottery table 671 selected by the table selecting means 102 described later, and one of the set values is associated with each of the plurality of lottery tables 671 stored in the ROM 67. ing. The setting control means 101 determines the on / off state of the setting change key switch 50b when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on while the setting change key switch 50b is on, starts a predetermined setting change process.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability in the lottery of the normal game is set in a plurality of stages distinguished by a plurality of types of setting values (here, six types), and the lottery table 671 (normal (A game lottery table). Then, when the setting change process is started, the manager of the pachinko hall where the slot machine 1 is installed can change the set value.

  The procedure for changing the set value is performed, for example, as follows. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts a setting change key (not shown) into the key cylinder and turns the setting change key switch 50b while the power switch 50a is OFF, and turns on the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, the setting change process is started by turning on the power switch 50a.

  Then, the set value of the winning probability is cyclically switched from setting 1 to setting 6 each time the administrator operates the setting change button 50c. This set value is notified by displaying it on the set value display 56. When the set value of the winning probability reaches a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, the set value is determined by operating the start switch 19. Then, when the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting change key switch 50b, the setting change process ends. Thereafter, when a medal is inserted from, for example, the medal insertion slot 25, the game is started.

(3) Table selection means 102
The table selection unit 102 in FIG. 6 includes the types of games (normal games, internally winning games, special games, and the like) controlled by the game control unit 100 on the main control board 63, and the set values set by the setting control unit 101 ( Based on the settings 1 to 6), one lottery table is selected from the plurality of lottery tables 671. That is, for example, in a normal game, the table selecting means 102 selects a lottery table 671 (a normal game lottery table) as a lottery table according to the set value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the winning probability.

(4) Role lottery means 103
The role lottery means 103 in FIG. 6 selects one of a plurality of role lottery results including a predetermined set winning and a loss as a role lottery result in the current game by the random number and the table selecting means 102. The selection is determined by a lottery process using the selected lottery table 671. Here, in each lottery table 671, the correspondence between the random number value and each role lottery result is defined. Specifically, for example, in each lottery table 671, the random number generated by the random number generator 103a described later is stored. Data indicating an area where each of the lottery results is associated with each other in the entire range is stored.

  The role lottery means 103 has a plurality of specific set winnings each including a plurality of roles (a winning role group “left bell” composed of “middle bell”, “one piece role 1” to “one piece role 4”, “middle level bell” The winning role group “Middle Bell” composed of “One-Piece Role 5” to “One-Piece Role 8”, the winning role group “Right Bell” composed of “Middle Bell”, “One-Piece Role 9” to “One-Piece Role 12” ), A plurality of role lottery results including a plurality of specific set wins in which the operation modes of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (each of which stop switches should be operated first), which are respectively advantageous to the player, are different. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not one of the two has been won.

a) Random number generating means 103a
The random number generating means 103a in FIG. 6 generates a random number for lottery within a predetermined random number value range. The random number generating means 103a can be composed of, for example, an oscillating circuit and a counter circuit that counts a clock signal generated by the oscillating circuit (a so-called hard random number). The random number generating means 103a can be constituted by, for example, a means for generating random numbers by the average taking method or a means for generating random numbers by adding prime numbers. These means can be configured, for example, by causing the main CPU 61 to execute a predetermined program (so-called soft random numbers). Note that both a hard random number and a soft random number may be provided, and the random number may be generated in a software manner based on the result.

b) random number extracting means 103b
The random number extracting unit 103b in FIG. 6 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generating unit 103a, and extracts the random number value generated by the random number generating unit 103a under a predetermined condition. The random number extracting means 103b extracts a random number value used in the lottery processing of the combination lottery means 103 in the current game at the timing when the start switch 19 is operated.

  Further, since the random number generating means 103a is constituted by a counter circuit or the like, the numerical value generated by the random number generating means 103a is not strictly a random number. However, since the timing at which the start switch 19 is operated is considered to be random, the numerical value extracted by the random number extracting means 103b can be treated substantially as a random number.

c) Lottery result determination means 103c
The lottery result determination unit 103c in FIG. 6 determines the winning combination lottery result in the current game based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit 103b in the current game and the game state in the current game. The lottery result determination unit 103c refers to the lottery table 671 corresponding to the current game state selected by the table selection unit 102, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit 103b is defined by the lottery table 671. By determining to which region the random number value region corresponding to each role lottery result belongs, the role lottery result in the current game is determined.

(5) Reel detecting means 105
6 includes detection signals from the left, center, and right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R, and left, center, and right reel motors 14L and 14M that drive the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. , And 14R, the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are detected. The reel detecting means 105 corresponds to a symbol located at a predetermined reference position (in this embodiment, for example, the middle stage of the display window 11) while the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are rotating and when the rotation is stopped. Each frame number is detected.

(6) Stop control means 106
The stop control means 106 of FIG. 6 controls the stop of each of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R by using the stop table 672 based on the operation of each of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M and 21R. And the symbols variably displayed by the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped in a display mode corresponding to the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103. The stop control means 106 determines, for each game, the combination of lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means 103c and the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, and the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R stop control is performed.

  As described in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 8, when a “Bell Group” (one of the winning combination groups “Left Bell”, “Middle Bell”, and “Right Bell”) is won, In accordance with the stop switch to be operated at the same time, it is set so that the combined roles are different. Further, the advantageous operation mode differs depending on the type of the “bell group”.

  As the stop table 672 for determining the stop positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, a plurality of tables are set corresponding to the respective role lottery results of the role lottery means 103. The stop table 672 stores the left, center, and right reels according to the rotation positions of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the left, center, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated. The number of sliding frames of 13L, 13M, and 13R is determined in advance. For each of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, the stop operation order of the corresponding left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is determined. Correspondingly, the number of sliding frames is different.

  In addition, if the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 is a win for one of the roles, the stop control means 106 determines whether or not the stop table 672 selected based on the result of the role lottery result and the left / middle / right stop switch. From the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the respective 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, the respective left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are set to win the winning combination. The number of sliding frames is determined, and stop control of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed. On the other hand, if the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 is a loss, the stop control means 106 determines the stop table 672 selected based on the result of the role lottery of the loss, and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. From the rotational position of each of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R when each is operated, the sliding of each of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R so as not to win any of a plurality of roles. The number of frames is determined, and stop control of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed.

  By the way, the upper limit is set for the number of sliding frames, and the left, middle and right stop switches 21L, 21M and 21R corresponding to the timing when the left, middle and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are at predetermined rotation positions are respectively set. If not operated, the stop control unit 106 determines whether the symbol displayed on the display window 11 corresponds to the winning combination even if the result of the combination drawing by the combination lottery unit 103 is a winning combination. , The left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R cannot be controlled to stop. In other words, the stop control means 106 determines the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R corresponding to the respective left, center, and right reels at predetermined rotation positions based on the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103. On the condition that the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols displayed on the display window 11 are stopped and displayed in a winning mode corresponding to the winning combination, so that the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M are displayed. , 13R.

(7) Notification determining means 107
The notification determining means 107 in FIG. 6 determines whether to notify the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R that are advantageous to the player. For example, even if the role lottery result is “Right Bell”, if it is not possible to know that, the player does not always operate the right stop switch 21R first, and “Middle Bell” They cannot always be aligned. On the other hand, in the AT game, when the result of the lottery result is “Right Bell”, the fact is notified and the player is prompted to operate the right stop switch 21R first, thereby increasing the chance of the player receiving the payout. It becomes possible.

  Here, when the player wins the "Middle Cherry", which is a shift to the AT permitted state in which the lottery of the AT game can be performed, the notification determining means 107 determines that the notification is to be performed, and further stores the information in the flag storage means 651. During the AT period, the state of the flag is set to ON. The state of the flag during the AT period stored in the flag storage means 651 is set to OFF when a predetermined number of AT games are executed. Further, by assigning any one of the bits forming the flag storage unit 651 to the flag during the AT period and setting ON / OFF of the bit, the state of the flag during the AT period is stored in the flag storage unit 651. can do.

  Then, in the AT game, when one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” is won, an operation mode (operation order) advantageous to the player set in each winning combination group in advance. ) Is notified to the player. Note that, after the transition to the AT period, if the AT game is performed a preset number of times, for example, 20 times, the AT period ends.

  Further, as described later, the command creating unit 108 creates a command according to the determination result of the notification determining unit 107. The notification determining unit 107 sets the command created by the command creating unit 108 as a command that can identify the type of the specific set winning (a command that shows an advantageous operation mode) or a command that cannot identify the type of the specific set winning (advantageous). Command for which the operation mode is unknown).

(8) Command creation means 108
The command creating unit 108 in FIG. 6 includes data relating to the result of the lottery in the lottery processing by the lottery lottery unit 103, and the operating devices operated by the player such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, and the start switch 19. A command for transmitting various data such as operation-related data to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) is generated. The command generated by the command creation unit 108 is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) by the sub control command transmission unit 111 as described later.

  The command creating unit 108 creates a command including “0” to “8” as a command that can identify a result of the lottery when the lottery by the lottery unit 103 is executed. As described later, the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) selects an effect to be executed based on the transmitted command. In other words, the command creating unit 108 creates a command for instructing the effect content to be executed on the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

  Then, when the notification determination means 107 determines that the operation mode advantageous to the player is not to be notified, that is, when the flag during the AT period is set to OFF, the command creation means 108 selects one of the "bell groups". Although it is possible to identify that the crab has been won, a command is created which does not include data indicating the type of the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”) and cannot identify the corresponding winning combination group. Further, when the notification determining means 107 determines that the operation mode advantageous to the player is to be notified, that is, when the flag is set to ON during the AT period, the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”) that has been won. "" And "right bell").

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the flag during the AT period is OFF, the command creation unit 108 determines whether any of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” has been won. Even if there is, the same command “No. 1” is created so that it is not possible to identify which winning combination group of the “Bell group”. On the other hand, when the flag is ON during the AT period, the command creating means 108 outputs the command of “No. 2” when the “left bell” is won, and the command of “No. 3” when the “bell” is won. Is created as the “right bell”, a command of “No. 4” is created.

  Note that the command creating means 108 creates the same command for the other lottery results regardless of whether the flag during the AT period is ON or OFF. For example, if the "Cherry Cherry" has been won, the command "No. 5", if the "BB" has been won, the command "No. 6", if the "CB" has been won, the command "No. 7" If the player wins "Replay", a command "8" is created. In the case of a loss, a command of “No. 0” is created.

(9) Symbol determination means 109
The symbol determination means (corresponding to “winning determination means”) 109 in FIG. 6 is controlled by the stop control means 106 based on the rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R detected by the reel detection means 105. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the symbol by each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stopped by the stop control is a predetermined display mode.

  The symbol determining means 109 determines that a special combination has been won when the symbols are aligned on the pay line in the display mode shown in the combination of "BB" and "CB" in FIG. Further, when the symbols are aligned on the pay line in the display mode shown in “Middle Bell”, “Single Role 1” to “Single Role 12” and “Middle Cherry” in FIG. When the symbols are aligned on the pay line in the display modes shown in “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” in FIG. 7, the symbol determining means 109 determines that the re-gaming winning.

(10) Payout control means 110
The payout control means 110 of FIG. 6 gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the determination result by the symbol determination means 109. When the symbol determination unit 109 determines that one of a plurality of winning combinations has been won, the payout control unit 110 determines that the number of stored credit medals is equal to the upper limit value (in this implementation, if the prize has a medal payout). After the number of medals reaches 50 (in the embodiment, for example, 50), the hopper unit 43 is operated to pay out medals by the payout number corresponding to the winning combination. Until the number of stored credit medals reaches the upper limit, the payout control unit 110 increases the number of credit medals by the above-mentioned number of payouts instead of the operation of the hopper unit 43, as the medal payout.

  By the way, when the symbol determination means 109 determines that the re-game combination has been won, the payout control means 110 determines that a predetermined number (three) of medals have been inserted, and activates the pay line of the next game. I do.

(11) Sub-control command transmission means 111
The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 in FIG. 6 transmits a command including various data created by the command creating unit 108 from the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) to the sub-control board 73 (sub CPU 71) as predetermined information. Send by road. The sub-control command transmission means 111 is created by the command creation means 108 and set by the setting control means 101, a game state such as a normal game state and a special game state, a combination lottery result of the combination lottery means 103, A command including data representing the state of the slot machine 1 such as a symbol determination result by the symbol determination unit 109, a spin / stop state of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, and a payout state of medals by the payout control unit 110. This is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

  The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 transmits a command created by the command creating unit 108 including data indicating the state of detection of the inserted medal by the insertion sensor 53, the operation state of the bet switch 15 and the maximum bet switch 17, and the like to the sub-control board. 73 (sub CPU 71). The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 is created by the command creating unit 108 including data indicating that various switches such as the start switch 19 and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R have been operated by the player. Is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

(12) Specific event detection means 112
The specific event detection means 112 detects whether a specific event has occurred. Specifically, the specific event includes a state in which an abnormal state different from a normal state occurs in the slot machine 1, that is, a so-called error occurrence.

  Specifically, the specific event includes, for example, a game medal error, a payout game medal error, a payout failure error, a payout game medal expiration error, a RWM error, a reel error, an overflow error, a game medal payout device connection error, A sensor error or the like corresponds. For these specific events (errors), error codes (E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and EA) for classifying the respective types are set. The details of these errors will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(13) Game stop means 113
The game stopping means 113 is for stopping the game (error processing) so that the game cannot be advanced based on the occurrence of the specific event (error) detected by the specific event detecting means 112.

(14) Flag storage means 651
The flag storage unit 651 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores various flags.

(15) Number of games counter 652
The number-of-games counter (400 counter) 652 includes an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the number of games. The initial game number, which is the initial value of the game number counter 652, is set to zero. After counting the number of games up to a preset number of games M (M = 400 in this embodiment), the number-of-games counter 652 is initialized again to 0, which is the initial value, and then up to the number of games M. It is configured to count the number of games. In the program, 0 to 399 are counted, and when the count reaches 399, the value returns to the initial value of 0 again.

(16) Game information storage means 653
The game information storage means 653 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the data shown in FIG. 9 assuming that the predetermined number of games, which is the predetermined totaling reference, is 400 games, and the number of set games M, which is the predetermined totaling reference, is 6000. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area for storing the total payout number for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (see FIG. 9). A 3-byte storage area (corresponding to the total payout number of P1 to P15) and a cumulative value of the total payout number of 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (see FIG. 9) A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of payouts in FIG. 9) for storing the total number of total payouts after installation or after RWM clear is formed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area (FIG. 9) for storing the number of payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. 9) (corresponding to the number of bonus articles to be paid from P1 to P15 in No. 9), and a 3-byte storage area for storing the accumulated value of the number of bonus articles to be paid for 400 games in each of the first to fifteenth phases. (Corresponding to the cumulative number of bonuses to be paid out of the PS in FIG. 9), a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of bonuses to be paid after the installation or after the RWM clear (the total of the bonuses in FIG. 9) (Corresponding to the number of payouts). Here, the number of paid-out articles is the sum of the number of paid-out sheets in BB and the number of paid-out sheets in CB. If there is an SB, it is the sum of the number of payouts in BB, the number of payouts in CB, and the number of payouts in SB. However, the SB corresponds to an ordinary accessory, and the small combination probability is increased by one game, and is not carried over to the next game even in the case of a loss.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a two-byte storage area (400 bytes) for storing the number of consecutive payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 is stored in the game information storage unit 653. 3 bytes for storing the cumulative value of the number of consecutive bonus game payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 9). Storage area (corresponding to the cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), and a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid after the installation or after the RWM clear (in FIG. (Corresponding to the total number of consecutive bonus articles paid out). Here, the number of consecutive payouts is the number of payouts in BB. Note that even if there is an SB, it is the number of payouts in BB.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games after installation or after RWM clear in the game information storage means 653 (corresponding to the total number of games in FIG. 9). A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9) for storing the number of advantageous section games after installation or after RWM clear is formed. The information related to the special game permissible state is totaled, and a predetermined calculation can be performed using the information.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the game information storage unit 653 stores, in the last 6000 games, the ratio of bonuses (percentage of the number of bonus PSs paid out in FIG. 9 with respect to the total number of paid out PSs: “Ratio of bonuses (6000). 1) storage area (corresponding to the cumulative PS bonus ratio in FIG. 9), and the bonus ratio in the cumulative game (total cumulative number of bonuses to be paid in FIG. 9). Is stored as a 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative bonus ratio in FIG. 9) for storing the percentage of the total cumulative number of payouts: referred to as the "ratio of bonuses (cumulative)". ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the game information storage means 653 stores, in the most recent 6000 game, the continuous bonus ratio (the percentage of the cumulative PS continuous bonus payout number in FIG. 9 with respect to the total cumulative PS payout number: “continuous”. 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the continuous PS ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) for storing the “principal ratio (6000 games)”), and the continuous SP ratio in the cumulative game (FIG. 9). A 1-byte storage area for storing the percentage of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out of the total cumulative number of paid out sheets (referred to as “continuous bonus ratio (cumulative total)”). (Corresponding to the continuous character ratio).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the game information storage means 653 stores the advantageous section ratio in the cumulative game (percentage of the total cumulative advantageous section game number in FIG. 9 with respect to the total cumulative total game number: "advantage section ratio ( A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total section advantageous section ratio in FIG. 9) for storing the total number is stored.

  The size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of roles, specific roles having different degrees of advantage given to the player by the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (the left bell, the middle bell, and the right bell in FIG. 8). Bell). When the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 becomes the specific role winning result of winning the specific role, the special game control means (not shown) of the main CPU 61 executes the AT game (an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the specific role). (Special game that informs the user of the game).

  In a game in an AT non-permitted state in which an AT game is not permitted (a special game non-permitted state in which a special game is not permitted), when a winning lottery by the role lottery means 103a wins the middle tier cherry, a payout display control means ("state display means") 118) performs control to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 corresponding to the state display means for displaying the special game permissible state or the special game non-permissible state so as to be identifiable, thereby performing the AT permissible state (special game). Is displayed (corresponding to the "advantageous section") (display of the special game permission state), and the game state setting means 100b changes the game state of the slot machine 1 to the AT permission state (permits the special game). (Special game allowance state) and set the initial number of games in the AT period. In the lighting control of the advantageous section lamp 47, the payout display control means 118 sets data indicating whether to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 after paying out the medal, and based on the set data, sets the advantageous section lamp. Here, the lamp 47 is turned on. Here, after the medal is paid out by winning the middle-stage cherry, data for turning on the advantageous section lamp 47 is set, and the set data (the advantageous section lamp is turned on) The advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on in accordance with the data for the above. Then, when the set number of games ends, the payout display control means 118 performs control for turning off the advantageous section lamp 47 to display an AT non-permissible state (display of a special game non-permissible state), and a game state setting means. 100b shifts the gaming state of the slot machine 1 to the AT non-permissible state. Note that the processing for determining whether or not the middle cherry has been won is determined by the game state setting means (corresponding to the “permissible state determination means”) 100b in the game in the special game non-permissible state to be in the special game permissible state. This corresponds to an example of a process for determining

  The period in which the control for lighting the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed, that is, the AT allowable state is the advantageous section, and the number of advantageous section games is the number of games (games) in the period in which the control for lighting the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed. Number). Note that the counting means 114a counts the number of games (the number of games) as the number of advantageous section games on condition that the control to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed. The information related to the special game permissible state is totaled, and a predetermined calculation can be performed using the information.

  In the present embodiment, when the middle cherry is won, the AT period of 20 games is provided without exception, but 0 game (losing) may be provided with a predetermined probability. In this case, when the middle cherry is won, the state shifts to the AT allowable state, and the payout display control means 118 controls the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 until a predetermined AT allowable state end condition is satisfied. The AT allowable state end condition is that, for example, a 1/8 drop lottery is performed in each game except for a so-called rare winning game such as a middle cherry in the AT allowable state. Configure to transition to state. At this time, when the falling lottery is won, the payout display control means 118 controls the turning off of the lit advantageous section lamp 47. Until the falling lottery is won, for example, it is determined whether to set the AT period by the AT lottery of each game. When this AT lottery is won, the initial number of games in the AT period is determined, and, for example, the AT period starts from the next game. The AT lottery is, for example, a winning combination of one of the winning combinations 1 to 12. During the AT period, the drop lottery is not performed, and the game in which the AT period has ended transitions from the AT permitted state to the AT non-permitted state. At this time, the payout display control means 118 controls to turn off the lighted advantageous section lamp 47. In this case, the AT game may not be performed even in the AT allowable state, but even in such a case, the AT period is likely to occur during the AT allowable state. To reflect. Note that, even when the AT period given by the winning of the AT lottery ends, the AT allowable state may be maintained, and the state may shift to the AT non-permissible state when a similar falling lottery is won.

  However, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has a ring buffer structure with respect to the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses, and the first period P1 and the second period P2 are stored. , The third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. The ring pointer is updated every 400 games, and the period value corresponding to the updated ring pointer is cleared and updated every game. In addition, the cumulative PS and the total sum are updated every 400 games with respect to the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses. Further, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are updated for each game. The total number of games is information that is updated irrespective of the determination result of the symbol determining means (winning determining means) 109.

  The advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is calculated for each game. The bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (total), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio (total) are calculated every 400 games.

  The total payout number, the bonus payout number, the continuous bonus payout number, the total number of games, and the advantageous section number of games correspond to the tabulated items, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the continuous bonus rate (6000 games) , The accessory ratio (6000 games), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) correspond to the calculation items.

  The total number of games is information that is updated irrespective of the determination result of the symbol determining means (winning determining means) 109, and the information is updated by the counting means 114a described later.

  Further, the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number of each of the cumulative PS and the total sum are information that is totaled (every 400 games in the present embodiment) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The total payout number, the payout amount, and the continuous payout amount in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are counted even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in the present embodiment). The total cumulative total number of games and the total cumulative number of advantageous section games are information that is totaled even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (each game in the present embodiment). In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  The advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. Are displayed in a predetermined order on a ratio display (corresponding to "display means") 69. In the present embodiment, the predetermined order is as follows: the first is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the second is the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the third is the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the fourth is the continuous bonus ratio. The fifth is the accessory ratio (cumulative).

  The continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the bonus ratio (total) are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, every 400 games). 2) is a calculated item, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is a calculated item calculated even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in the present embodiment), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio ( The cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total) are in a specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the order opposite to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). Order). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only the first calculation item (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total)) in the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 is calculated. . In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, although the specific order is reverse to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific order is displayed on the ratio display 69. The order may be the same as the predetermined order. Furthermore, although the calculation item of the first order in the predetermined order is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the present invention is not limited to this.

(17) Game history monitoring means 114
The game history monitoring means 114 of FIG. 6 monitors the game history, and functions as a counting means 114a and a calculating means 114b.

a) Tabulation means 114a
The tallying unit 114a of FIG. 6 updates the storage value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 for each game, and the tallying unit 114a stops the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to stop the game. Is completed and before the start of the next game, the storage value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 is incremented by one. The tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the stored value of the game number counter 652 is equal to the set game number M (= 400) which is the set tally criterion, and determines whether the stored value of the game number counter 652 is equal to the set game number M ( = 400), the stored value of the game number counter 652 is cleared to 0, which is the initial value. Note that the initial value of the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to the set game number M (= 400), and the stored value of the game number counter 652 is set to 1 after the game ends and before the start of the next game. The number of games may be counted by decrementing by one.

  The tallying unit 114a tallies up the storage contents of the game information storage unit 653 shown in FIG. In the present specification, claims, drawings, and the like, “totaling” means “together and sum up”, “to accumulate numbers”, and “together to sum up numbers so far. Adding a new value to the set value or the value accumulated so far. "

  Specifically, the tallying unit 114a is required for the values of the total payout number, the payout number, and the continuous payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 for each game. , The total payout number, the payout number, and the continuous payout number for the current period are updated. In addition, the tallying unit 114a updates the value of the total game number of the total total for each game by incrementing the value by one, and updates the value of the total number of advantageous section games by one as necessary.

  Further, the tallying unit 114a calculates the total number of payouts from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 for every 400 games, stores the cumulative value in the total number of payouts of the cumulative PS, and starts from the first period P1. Calculate the accumulation of the number of bonus articles to be paid up to the fifteenth term P15, store the accumulated value in the number of bonus articles to be paid of the cumulative PS, and calculate the accumulation of the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15. Then, the cumulative value is stored as the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out of the cumulative PS. Also, the totaling means 114a adds the total payout amount of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total total payout amount every 400 games to thereby obtain the total total payout amount. The total number of paid-out articles is updated by adding the number of paid-out articles in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 to the total number of paid-out articles. Then, the total number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid is updated by adding the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid.

  The counting means 114a updates the ring pointer after updating the storage contents of the game information storage means 653 performed every 400 games after the number of games after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 400, and then updates the ring pointer. The value of the total payout number, the number of bonus articles, and the number of consecutive bonus articles in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are cleared to zero. The ring pointer is updated in the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. The first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are sequentially repeated.

b) arithmetic means 114b
The calculating means 114b of FIG. 6 calculates the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) for each game based on the stored contents of FIG. 9, and calculates the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio. The (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated for every 400 games.

  In the calculation of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games to the total cumulative number of games is calculated. In the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of consecutive bonus payouts of the cumulative PS to the total number of cumulative payouts of the cumulative PS is calculated. In the calculation, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of paid-out articles of the cumulative PS to the total number of paid-out sheets of the cumulative PS is calculated. Furthermore, in the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out to the total cumulative number of paid outs is calculated. Then, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of the paid-out articles to the total number of the paid-out articles is calculated.

(18) Display control means 115
The display control means 115 of FIG. 6 performs display control for performing display based on FIGS. 11 and 12 and display control for performing display based on FIG.

  First, the correspondence between a plurality of illuminable locations of a 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data will be described with reference to FIG.

  The seven-segment display has eight lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, and eight lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Correspond to the 0th bit, the 1st bit, the 2nd bit, the 3rd bit, the 4th bit, the 5th bit, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit of 1 byte (8 bits) of display data, respectively. When the value is 0, the light is turned off and when it is 1, the light is turned on. For bits, the least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and for the bytes, the least significant byte is described as the first byte.

  For example, when the 1-byte value is $ FF (hexadecimal notation), that is, when 11111111 (binary notation), all of the lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP Light. When the value of one byte is $ 40 (hexadecimal notation), that is, 01000000 (binary notation), the lightable portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP can be turned on. Only the point G lights up.

  Next, the display contents of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 11 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, in which the percentage (%) is 50 (%).

  The display items of the ratio display 69 include (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), (3) character ratio (6000 games), and (4) continuous character There are a ratio (total) and (5) an accessory ratio (total), which are displayed according to the display method shown in FIG. However, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 11 indicate the display order. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 11 corresponds to the first lighting mode (normal display mode), and the display control corresponds to normal control.

  Specifically, in the (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation “7A” indicating “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69. Is displayed in the lower two digits (tens place and ones place) segment of the ratio display 69 and the number of advantageous section games in the cumulative game since the installation or the RWM clear (the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of games in the cumulative game (the total number of games in the total of FIG. 9) are displayed.

  In the (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation “6b” indicating “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)” is shown in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69. Is displayed, and the last two-digit (tens and ones) segment of the ratio indicator 69 is the most recent of the number of consecutive payouts in the 6000 game (the number of consecutive payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total payout number (the total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) in the 6000 game are displayed.

  Further, in the (3) accessory ratio (6000 games), the abbreviation “7b” indicating “the accessory ratio (6000 games)” is added to the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69. The lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69 are displayed, and the total number of the bonuses paid out in the most recent 6000 game (the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) in the most recent 6000 games is displayed. The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of payouts (the total number of payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) are displayed.

  Further, in the (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation “6c” indicating “continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)” is added to the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69. Displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69 or the number of consecutive bonuses paid out in the cumulative game after the installation or after the RWM clear (the total number of consecutive bonuses paid out in FIG. 9). ), The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of payouts (the total number of payouts in FIG. 9) in the total game after installation or RWM clear.

  Further, in (5) Combination ratio (cumulative), abbreviation "7c" indicating "combination amount (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of ratio indicator 69. In the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, the setting of the number of bonuses paid out in the cumulative game after the installation or after the RWM clear (the total number of bonuses paid out in FIG. 9). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total number of payouts (the total number of payouts in FIG. 9) in the cumulative game after or after the RWM clear are displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, and therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower order of the ratio display 69 is used. 99 (%) is displayed in the two-digit (tens and ones) segment.

  However, (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), (3) bonus ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), (5) In the physical ratio (cumulative), as shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 11, the hundreds place lit location DP is lit, but each of the thousands place, the tens place, and the ones place Is turned off. The boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment is easily grasped by turning on the hundreds of possible locations DP.

  These (1) advantageous section ratio (total), (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), (3) bonus ratio (6000 games), (4) continuous bonus ratio (total), (5) The physical ratio (cumulative) is displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period, and further (3) the character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (4) the ratio of consecutive bonuses (total) is displayed for a certain period of time, and further (5) the ratio of bonuses (total) is displayed for a certain period of time.

  These displays (1) to (5) are sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, for example, when the game has not reached 6000 games (2) and (3), the upper two digits of the segment are blinked. For example, when the game has not reached the 175,000 game, the upper two-digit segments are blinked in (1), (4), and (5). Further, in (1) to (5), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) respectively , The lower two digits of the segment are displayed blinking.

  However, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again, the display is performed from (1) the advantageous section ratio (total) regardless of the display item when the power is turned off. For example, if the power is turned off while the (3) accessory ratio (6000 games) is being displayed and the power is turned on again, (1) the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed.

  Note that the abbreviations are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 11, as long as the display items are different from each other.

  Subsequently, the display contents of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 in a model having no advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 12 is a specific display example of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in a model having no advantageous section.

  As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 12, the abbreviation “7A” indicating “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio indicator 69, “−−” (only the lit location G is lit) is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69. However, as in the case of (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in FIG. 11, the hundredth place lightable location DP is also lit in the case of (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) in FIG. 12. However, each of the thousands of places, the tens place, and the ones place where lighting is possible DP is not turned on. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 12 corresponds to the first lighting mode (normal display mode), and the display control corresponds to normal control.

  Finally, the display contents of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 13 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69 when an RWM error occurs.

  As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 13, when an RWM error occurs, all of the lit locations A and B are shown in the thousands, hundreds, tens and ones places of the ratio display 69. , C, D, E, F, G, and DP are turned on. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 13 corresponds to the second lighting mode (special display mode), and the display control corresponds to the special control.

  Comparing the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 13 with the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 11 or FIG. 12, the special control at the time of the occurrence of the RWM error in FIG. All the thousands of places, the tens place and the ones place of the ratio display 69 which are not lit in the normal control are lit. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the RWM error has occurred by the display of the ratio display 69.

(19) Credit display control means 116
The credit display control means 116 of FIG. 6 performs display control for displaying the number of stored medals on the credit display 45.

(20) Cancel control means 117
The cancel control unit 117 in FIG. 6 does not drive the cancel coil using the electromagnet, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum stored number or during a game, so that the rail portion of the medal selector 48 does not operate. The medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout port 39 regardless of whether they are regular or irregular. In cases other than the above, the cancel coil using the electromagnet is driven to operate the rail portion of the medal selector 48, whereby it is determined whether or not the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is authentic. Only regular medals are guided to the hopper unit 43.

(21) Payout display control means 118
The payout display control means 118 in FIG. 6 can specify (1) the payout number display control for displaying the payout number via the payout control means 110 and (2) the type of the specific event (error) on the payout display 46. And error code display control for displaying special information (error code), which is important information. Further, the payout display control means 118 displays that the dot is in the advantageous section state by lighting the tens place or the ones place dot (corresponding to the lightable portion DP) of the payout display 46, and displays the tens place. Display control is performed to indicate that the state is not the advantageous section state by extinguishing the dot and the first dot.

  Here, the game stop means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the last reel (the last reel among the left, middle, and right reels 113L, 113M, and 113R). At a predetermined timing after the stop operation on the last reel is performed (specifically, after a slip occurs after the stop operation on the last reel and after four-phase excitation by the stepping motor), the game is stopped (error processing). I do. At the same time, the payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying special information (error code) on the payout display 46.

  That is, the game stopping means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the last reel (final reel) of the left, middle, and right reels 113L, 113M, and 113R. Then, the game stop means 113 performs a game stop (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation on the last reel is performed, and the payout display control means 118 displays special information (error code) on the payout display 46. Is displayed. However, this does not apply to the E5 error.

  When the reset switch (not shown, but the setting change button 50c of the operation box 50 also serves as the reset switch) is operated in the state where the error has occurred, the game stop means 113 A release condition for releasing the game stop (error processing) is satisfied. In this case, the game stop means 113 cancels the game stop by the game stop means 113, and makes the progress of the game possible. Further, the payout display control means 118 stops displaying the special information (error code display) performed on the payout display 46. However, in the case of an RWM error (E4 error), the RWM error (E4 error) is canceled by changing the setting.

  Here, the display contents of the payout display 46 related to the error will be described with reference to FIG.

  The error contents displayed on the payout display 46 include “game medal error”, “payout game medal error”, “payout failure error”, “payout game medal out error”, “RWM error”, “reel error”, “reel error”, There are "overflow error", "game medal payout device connection error", and "sensor error".

  The game medal error (error code E0) is a state in which the medal stays or passes abnormally through the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48, and the 7-segment display (payout display) occurs. The display content of the column of “device” is displayed on the payout display 46. The payout game medal error (error code E1) indicates that the medal is clogged at the payout exit of the hopper unit 43, and the display content in the 7-segment display (payout display) field is the payout display 46. Will be displayed. Further, the payout failure error (error code E2) is one in which the payout sensor 54 is in an ON state other than at the time of payout of medals, and the display content in the 7-segment display (payout display) column is the payout display 46. Will be displayed. The payout game medal exhaustion error (error code E3) is an occurrence of a so-called hopper empty state in which the medals in the hopper unit 43 are empty, and is displayed in a 7-segment display (payout display) column. The contents are displayed on the payout display 46.

  The RWM error (error code E4) indicates that a backup failure or the like of a RWM ((Read Write Memory) read / write memory, also referred to as a random access memory (RAM) is occurring). The display content of the column of the segment display (payout display) is displayed on the payout display 46.

  The reel error (error code E5) is a rotation drum (reel) position detection error (a position detection error by the left, middle, and right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R), and includes left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R due to a power failure during the stop processing of the reels, a failure of the reel unit during the stop processing of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. This is a state in which an error has occurred, and the display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46. The overflow error (error code E6) is a state in which the auxiliary tank provided beside the hopper unit 43 is full of medals, and the display contents in the 7-segment display (payout display) are paid out. It is displayed on the display 46. Further, the game medal payout device connection error (error code E7) occurs when the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43 is defective and the hopper unit 43 is out of the normal position. Yes, the display contents in the 7-segment display (payout display) column are displayed on the payout display 46. Further, the sensor error (error code EA) is a state in which abnormal passing of medals has occurred, and when the insertion sensor 53 for detecting insertion of medals detects passage of medals in a state where insertion of medals is not possible. The display content of the 7-segment display (payout display) column is displayed on the payout display 46.

  Among these errors, in the gaming medal error (error code E0), the payout failure error (error code E2), the reel error (error code E5), and the sensor error (error code EA), the left, center, and right reels 13L, This is a detectable error even when at least one of 13M and 13R is rotating.

(22) External output signal control means 119
The external output signal control means 119 (corresponding to "signal generation means" of the present invention) 119 in FIG. 6 controls the relay (see FIG. 68) of the external terminal concentrated terminal board 59 to control the output of the external signal. . In the present embodiment, in addition to a medal insertion signal representing information related to medal insertion and a medal payout signal corresponding to information related to medal payout, the main CPU 61 or An ID information signal corresponding to the identifier information (ID information) pre-assigned to the main board 63, the ratio of each calculation item calculated by the game history monitoring means 114 (advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous character ratio (6000 games) ), The ratio information signal corresponding to the ratio information relating to the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (total), the bonus ratio (total)), the specific event (error) detected by the specific event detection unit 112 There is an error information signal representing error information about

  Note that the ratio information may be, for example, a value indicating the value of the ratio itself of each operation item, or an operation item whose calculated value of the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined value of the ratio among the operation items. Information (for example, when only the calculated value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) is equal to or more than a predetermined value of the predetermined ratio), the information may indicate the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total). Further, the error information may be, for example, information indicating the content of an error detected by the specific event detection unit 112, or may indicate, for example, the number of occurrences of the error detected by the specific event detection unit 112 with a predetermined number of games. It may be information.

(Sub control board)
Next, the configuration of the sub-control board 73 will be described in detail. The sub-control board 73 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 63 and performs an effect according to the operation and the state of the main control board 63. As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control board 73 includes various functions realized by executing a program stored in the memory 75 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. I have.

(1) Sub-control command receiving means 201
The sub-control command receiving unit 201 shown in FIG. 6 receives, as predetermined information, a command including various data transmitted by the sub-control command transmitting unit 111 of the main control board 63 (main CPU 61). The sub-control command receiving unit 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63 and, when receiving the command, notifies each function of the sub-control board 73 according to the type of the command.

(2) Production content determination means 202
The effect content determining means 202 in FIG. 6 is for determining the content of the effect according to the command received by the sub-control command receiving means 201. Specifically, a moving image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 is determined from an effect pattern set in advance in accordance with the progress of the game, the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103, or the like, or from the speakers 31L and 31R. An effect such as deciding the music or voice to be played or blinking the light sources of the upper lamp section 33 and the lower lamp sections 37L and 37R simultaneously or individually is determined.

  Then, if the received command corresponds to the received command during the AT period and the type of the winning combination group (bell group) that has been won can be identified, the effect content determination means 202 determines the player corresponding to the type of the winning combination group. The information effect is determined so that an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is understood, and if the received command does not correspond to the AT period, an effect in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is unknown is determined. For example, when the command of “No. 1” shown in FIG. 8 is received according to the result of the lottery, it is understood that the player has won one of the winning combination groups of “Bell Group” because it is not during the AT period. Select one of the effects from the group of effects that you do not know if you won the left bell, middle bell, or right bell. When the "No. 2" command shown in FIG. 8 is received, one of the effects that indicate that the "left bell" has been won or the effect that prompts the user to operate the left stop switch 21L first. Select When the commands of “No. 3” and “No. 4” shown in FIG. 8 are received, the effect contents are determined in the same manner.

  Also, when receiving the commands of “No. 5” to “No. 8” shown in FIG. 8, the effect content determination means 202 similarly selects one of the effect groups indicating the possibility of winning in each winning combination group. Select the production of Further, when the command of “No. 0” is received, similarly, one effect is selected from the effect group corresponding to the loss so as not to impair the player's expectation.

  As the effect contents, for example, the operation order of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 by the effect content determining means 202, and the left / middle / right stop switches are provided by the speakers 31L, 31R. The operation order of each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is notified by voice or the lamp provided on each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is blinked in a predetermined order. Or blinks the backlight provided on each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R in a predetermined order to notify the operation sequence of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. There are production contents such as.

  Then, the effect content determination means 202 transmits a signal including data on the determined effect content to the effect display control means 203 and the voice control means 204 described below.

(3) Effect display control means 203
The effect display control means 203 shown in FIG. 6 displays a moving image on the liquid crystal display 27 based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determining means 202, the upper lamp part 33, the lower lamp parts 37L, 37R, and the like. Effects such as blinking the light sources simultaneously or individually.

(4) Voice control means 204
The sound control means 204 of FIG. 6 performs effects such as playing music from the speakers 31L and 31R and outputting sound based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determination means 202.

(motion)
Subsequently, the operation of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, during the AT period (when the flag during the AT period is ON), when a “bell group” (one of “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”) is won, the winning is determined. An effect of notifying the operation order of each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the role group and advantageous to the player is executed in the sub-control board 73, and the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R advantageous to the player are provided. The operation order is notified.

  In the following description, various functions and means described above, and other functions realized by the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 executing various programs (detailed description is omitted) This is the process executed by Also, the processing of setting various flags to ON (ON) or OFF (OFF) and setting values to the various flags in the following processing is a well-known technique. Detailed description is omitted.

1. Processing at Power-on The processing at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power-on process is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  The power-on process shown in FIG. 15 is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. When the power switch 50a of the slot machine 1 is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is on. Is determined (step S1), if the power interruption signal is determined to be ON (YES in step S1), the operation waits as it is, and if the power interruption signal is determined to be OFF (NO in step S1). ), And the state in which access to the RWM 65 is enabled (step S2). Then, RWM backup failure determination processing, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 16, is performed (step S3). Subsequently, a power-on initialization process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17 is performed (step S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (step S5). When it is determined that the door sensor 58 is ON (the front door 5 is closed) (YES in step S5), the process proceeds to step S8.

  If the door sensor 58 is not in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) in the determination processing in step S5, that is, if it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (NO in step S5), the setting change key switch 50b is operated. It is then determined whether or not it is in the ON state (step S6). When it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S8. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state (YES in step S6), a setting change process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 19 is performed (step S7). As described above, in order to enhance safety as a countermeasure against fraud, the slot machine 1 does not shift to the setting change process in step S7 unless the front door 5 is open and the setting change key switch 50b is not ON. It has become.

  In step S8, it is determined whether the result of the RWM backup failure determination processing in step S3 is defective. This determination processing is to determine an RWM backup failure when an RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG. 16 described later.

  If it is determined that the backup status of the RWM is bad (YES in step S8), an error process (specifically, an E4 error) described later with reference to FIG. 20 is performed (step S9). ). Then, the power-on processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM backup state is not defective (NO in step S8), it is determined whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S8). S10). If it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S10), the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S10), the restart state of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is set. Is performed (step S11), and the process proceeds to step S12. More specifically, a process of returning the rotating reel among the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to a state before the power interruption is performed. When the power is turned on, settings are made so that the current states of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R can be restored.

  In step S12, a sensor error determination process (EA error) described later in detail with reference to FIG. 18 is performed. Then, the power-on processing ends.

1.1. RWM backup failure determination processing The RWM backup failure determination processing (step S3) in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the checksum value (step S31). This is to determine whether or not the value matches the checksum value held at the time of power failure. If they do not match, it is determined that the backup is defective. The checksum value is obtained by regarding the data stored in the predetermined area of the RWM value as a sequence of integer values, obtaining a sum, and using the remainder obtained by dividing the sum by a predetermined constant as inspection data.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the power-off flag (step S32). In this case, a predetermined numerical value determined in advance at the time of power failure is stored, and if the value is other than the predetermined numerical value, it is determined that the power failure is in an abnormal state.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines the stack pointer (Step S33). This is to determine the range of the stack pointer at the time of power failure, and holds the address of the most recently referenced position. If this address is outside the range of the predetermined address, an abnormal state is detected. Is determined.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines the set value (step S34). Specifically, it is determined whether the set value is in the range of 1 to 6. If it is out of the range, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the higher rank of the internal winning information (step S35). This is to determine whether or not the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) in the winning lottery is within the range of predetermined higher-level data. If the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) of the role lottery is out of the range of the predetermined upper data, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether the backup of the RWM is defective (step S36). Based on the determination results of steps S31 to S35, it is determined whether the state is abnormal, that is, whether the state is defective. If it is determined that the state is not defective (NO in step S36), the process returns to the power-on process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is defective (YES in step S36), the specific event detecting unit 112 sets an RWM backup failure (step S37). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 clears all the contents of the RWM 65 relating to the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 (step S38). Here, the contents to be cleared are, for example, the first to fifteenth periods P1 to P15 in FIG. 9, the cumulative PS, and the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses, respectively. In addition, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are provided. Also, the cumulative PS in FIG. 9 and the respective ratios and continuous ratios of the respective bonuses in the total total. Also, it is the total cumulative advantageous section ratio of FIG. Further, it is the setting contents of the display data of the thousands display, the hundreds display, the tens display, and the ones display of the ratio display device (role ratio monitor) 69. Further, a 6000 arrival flag, a total game number upper limit flag, and a total payout upper limit flag described later. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

1.3. Power-On Initial Setting Process The power-on initial setting process (step S4) in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control means 115 clears the ratio display number and sets the value to 0 (step S51). As a result, when the power is turned on, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is a display item corresponding to the ratio display number 0, is displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 clears the ratio blinking flag and sets the value to 0 (step S52). Thus, when the display content of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is displayed in a blinking manner, it starts from lighting when the power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets a display switching timer (step S53). When a value corresponding to, for example, 5 seconds is set in the display switching timer, the display items (1) to (5) (see FIG. 11) displayed on the ratio display 69 are switched every 5 seconds. .

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets a ratio blink timer (step S54). When a value corresponding to, for example, 0.3 seconds is set in the ratio blink timer, the lighting and the extinguishing are switched every 0.3 seconds. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

1.3. Sensor Error Determination Process The sensor error determination process (step S12) of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B is ON (Step S71). When it is determined that none of the selector sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S71), the process returns to the power-on process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is ON (YES in step S71), a sensor error (EA error) flag is set as an error determination flag (step S72). The error determination flag is a so-called reservation flag (hold flag) for determining whether or not to perform error notification by the sub CPU 71 for holding the shift to the error processing. Based on the error determination flag, a transmission command “payout abnormality” described later is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the power-on processing in FIG.

1.4. Setting Change Processing The setting change processing (step S7) of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The setting control unit 101 determines whether a backup failure of the RWM of the main CPU 61 has been set (step S101). This determination processing is to determine that the RWM backup failure is set when the RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG.

  If it is determined that the backup failure has not been set (NO in step S101), the setting control unit 101 reads the set value information (step S102), and proceeds to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup failure is set (YES in step S101), the payout display control unit 118 performs display control to display “C” on the set value display 56 (step S103). Then, the setting control unit 101 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is on (step S104). If it is determined that the setting change button 50c has not been turned on (NO in step S104), the process enters a standby state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is on (YES in step S104), the setting control unit 101 sets the setting value 1 (step S105), and proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change button 50c is on. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is turned on (YES in step S106), the setting control unit 101 updates the setting value (step S107), and returns to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50b is not turned on (NO in step S106), the setting control unit 101 determines whether or not operation of the start lever (start switch 19) is detected (step S106). S108). When it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has not been detected (NO in step S108), the process returns to step S106. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has been detected (YES in step S108), the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change key switch 50b is off (step S109). ). When it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the off state (NO in step S109), the state is changed to the standby state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is off (YES in step S109), the setting control unit 101 determines the setting value (step S110), and the setting change process ends.

1.5. Error Processing The error processing (step S9) in FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. The error processing in FIG. 20 (step S233), the error processing in FIG. 23 (step S254), the error processing in FIG. 29 (step S411), and the error processing in FIG. Is performed.

  The game stop means 113 stores the current game state (step S131). Then, the game stop means 113 sets an error flag corresponding to the error state (error state) that has occurred, and transmits the error flag to the sub CPU 71 (step S132). Specifically, it is transmitted from the sub control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71.

  The game stopping means 113 saves the contents of the payout display 46 (step S133). The payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying an error code on the payout display 46 (step S134).

  The game stopping means 113 saves the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S135), and turns off the settings of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) (step S136).

  The game stop means 113 determines whether or not an E4 error is present (step S137). If it is determined that the state is the E4 error state (YES in step S137), the process waits until the setting is changed (step S138).

  When it is determined in the determination processing in step S137 that the state is not the E4 error state (NO in step S137), the game stopping unit 113 determines whether the state is the E3 error state (step S139). When it is determined that the state is not an E3 error state (NO in step S139), the process proceeds to step S141. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is an E3 error state (YES in step S139), the game stopping unit 113 determines whether the error release sensor is in an on state (step S140). In addition, since this step S140 results in an E3 error (hopper empty error), the error cancellation sensor here is a door key reset. This door key reset is achieved by turning a key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. If it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is in the ON state (YES in step S140), the process proceeds to step S143. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is not in the ON state (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S141.

  In step S141, the game stopping means 113 determines whether the setting change button 50c is on. Here, the setting change button 50c functions as a reset switch. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is not in the ON state (NO in step S141), the process returns to step S137.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is on (YES in step S141), the game stopping unit 113 determines whether the door sensor 58 is on (step S142). If it is determined that the door sensor 58 is on (YES in step S142), the process returns to step S137. If it is determined that the door sensor 58 is not on (NO in step S142), the process proceeds to step S143.

  In step S143, the game stopping means 113 determines whether or not any of the selector sensors A, B, C, and the payout sensors A, B is on. When it is determined that any one of the selector sensors A, B, C and the payout sensors A, B is on (YES in step S143), the process returns to step S137, and the selector sensors A, B, C, the payout sensors A, If it is determined that none of B is in the ON state (NO in step S143), the process proceeds to step S144.

  In step S144, the game stopping means 113 returns the states of the hopper unit 43 and the cancel coil (medal selector 48) to the original state (step S144). Then, the payout display control unit 118 clears (initializes) the error code display (step S145). Further, the game stop means 113 restores the contents of the payout display 46 (step S146), and restores the game state (step S147).

  The main CPU 61 transmits an error release event (signal) to the sub CPU 71 (step S148), and determines whether or not the medal payout start event (signal) of the sub CPU 71 is transmitted (step S149). Then, the error processing ends.

2. Main Processing The main processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the main process is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  First, an overflow error determination process (E6 error), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 22, is performed (step S201). More specifically, the overflow error is detected by the overflow sensor 57a when the medal becomes full in the auxiliary tank arranged adjacent to the hopper unit 43.

  It is determined whether a specified number of medals (three in this embodiment) have been inserted (step S202), and the process waits until it is determined that a specified number of medals have been inserted (NO in step S202). On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of medals have been inserted (YES in step S202), it is determined whether the start switch 19 has been operated (step S203). It waits until it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (NO in step S203), and if it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (YES in step S203), the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is executed (step S203). Step S204).

  Then, after the winning lottery process, the rotation of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is started (step S205). It is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been operated (step S206), and if it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated (NO in step S206), the operation is performed. Wait until done. When it is determined that the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been operated (YES in step S206), the stop control unit 106 controls the stop of the reel rotation to correspond to the operated stop switch. The rotation of the reel to be stopped is stopped (step S207).

  A reel error determination process (E5 error) described later in detail with reference to FIG. 23 is performed (step S208).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R have stopped (step S209). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S209), the process returns to step S206. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have been stopped (YES in step S209), the symbol determination unit 109 performs the symbol determination (that is, the winning determination). (Step S210).

  Then, after the symbol determination process (winning determination process), a game information totalizing process which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 24 is performed (step S211). Subsequently, a medal payout process is executed by the payout control means 110 as needed (step S212). The details of the medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the process returns to step S201.

  Since the game information totaling process is performed after the symbol determination process (winning determination process) and before the medal payout process, even if the setting is unexpectedly changed during the payout of the game medium, the game Information aggregation processing has already been performed. For this reason, the calculation result (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (total), the continuous character ratio (6000 games), the character ratio ( Inspection or confirmation by the inspector of the game history information including the 6000 games), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) can be easily performed by the inspector. In this case, the counting of the counting items can be performed accurately.

2.1. 21. Overflow Error Determination Process The overflow error determination process (step S201) in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection unit 112 determines whether an overflow error has occurred (step S231). Specifically, when the auxiliary tank is full of medals, the two overflow sensors 57a inserted into the auxiliary tank are energized. It is determined that an overflow error has occurred. If it is determined that an overflow error has not occurred (NO in step S231), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that an overflow error has occurred (YES in step S231), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an error code “E6” (step S232). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 20 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S233), and the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG.

2.2. Reel error determination processing The reel error determination processing (step S208) in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R (the spinning drum) have stopped rotating (step S251). When it is determined that all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped rotating (YES in step S251), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R has not stopped rotating (NO in step S251), the specific event detection unit 112 determines that the rotating reel (turning drum) is in operation. It is determined whether or not this rotation is in a state of steady rotation, which is a state of rotating at a steady rotation speed (step S252). When it is determined that the rotating reel is in a steady rotation state (YES in step S252), the process returns to step S251.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation of the rotating reel is not the steady rotation state (NO in step S252), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an error code “E5” (step S253). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 20 is performed by the game stopping means 113 or the like (step S254).

  Then, the reel (turning drum) is restarted by the main CPU 61 (step S255). Specifically, once the rotation is stopped, the rotation is started at a normal rotational acceleration to a normal rotational speed. The rotation speed may be set to a normal value without stopping. Then, it is set by the main CPU 61 that the reel (turning drum) can be stopped (step S256). In other words, by setting the turning drum stop enable in the step, the reel stops at the position where the reel should stop without operating the stop switch. Then, the process returns to step S251.

2.3. Game Information Aggregation Processing The game information aggregation processing (step S211) of FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a adds the number of winnings in the current game to the total number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period in FIG. 9, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Is performed (step S271).

  The tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in the first-class accessory (for example, BB) (step S272). When it is determined that the character is not in the first-class accessory (NO in step S272), the process proceeds to step S274. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is in the first class accessory (YES in step S272), the counting unit 114a determines the continuation of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 25, is performed by adding the number of winnings in the current game to the number of paid-out items (step S273). Then, the process proceeds to step S274.

  In step S274, the tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in a first-class accessory or a second-class accessory (for example, CB). When it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (YES in step S274), the process proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is neither a first-class character nor a second-class character (NO in step S274), the counting unit 114a determines whether the character is a normal character (for example, SB) (step S274). Step S275). If it is determined that the character is in the normal role (YES in step S275), the process proceeds to step S276. If it is determined that the character is not in the normal role (NO in step S275), the process proceeds to step S277.

  In step S276, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of winnings in the current game to the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed (step S276), and the process proceeds to step S277.

  In step S277, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (that is, whether the total game number is equal to or less than the maximum value of 4 bytes for storing the total number of total games in FIG. 9). No) is determined. When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S277), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S277), the counting means 114a adds 1 to the total game number in the total cumulative number in FIG. The game number updating process described in detail is performed (step S278), and the process proceeds to step S279.

  In step S279, the counting means 114a determines whether or not control for turning on the advantageous section lamp 47 is performed (that is, whether or not the section is an advantageous section). When it is determined that the control for turning on the advantageous zone lamp 47 is not performed (NO in step S279), the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control of turning on the advantageous zone lamp 47 is performed (YES in step S279), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous zone games in FIG. The game number updating process described in detail is performed (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281.

  In step S281, the counting means 114a sets 1 to the number of ratio calculations (step S281).

  Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the 400 counter (game number counter 652) (step S282). Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the 400 counter is 400 (step S283). Then, when it is determined that the 400 counter is not 400 (NO in step S283), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 400 counter is 400 (YES in step S283), the counting unit 114a resets the 400 counter to 0, and sets 5 to the number of ratio calculations (step S284). That is, 5 is set to the number of ratio calculations for every 400 games, and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the bonus ratio (Total) is calculated, and in other games, the ratio calculation count is set to 1 and only the advantageous section ratio (Total) is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S284, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the total payout number from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 9 and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the total payout number for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S285). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 9 and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of consecutive bonuses for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S286). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the number of payables from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. 9 and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the number of payables for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S287).

  Subsequent to step S287, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total cumulative total payout number is a 4-byte maximum value for storing the total cumulative total payout number in FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not the following is true (step S288). When it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S288), the process proceeds to step S292.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S288), the counting means 114a adds the total payout number of the total cumulative number of payouts in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The total payout number of the total total is updated by adding the total payout number of the period corresponding to the ring pointer (the total payout number of the latest 400 games). The cumulative update processing described in detail later with reference to FIG. , Every 400 games (step S289). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a adds the consecutive number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in FIG. (The number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out) is added to the total number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out, and a cumulative update process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 28 is performed for every 400 games (step S290). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of the bonuses to be paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in the total cumulative number of the bonuses paid out in FIG. A total update processing of updating the total cumulative number of paid-out articles by adding the number of paid-out articles is performed for every 400 games (step S291), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 28 (step S291). move on.

  In step S292, the counting means 114a updates the ring pointer (step S292). The ring pointer indicates the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. In other words, it is updated every 400 games so as to indicate the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 while repeating the sequence.

  The counting unit 114a determines whether the ring pointer update result is 0, that is, whether the ring pointer has returned to the initial position (step S293). When it is determined that the ring pointer update result is not 0 (NO in step S293), the process proceeds to step S295. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ring pointer update result is 0 (YES in step S293), the counting unit 114a determines that the number of games since the installation or the RWM clear has reached 6000 games, and thus the 6000 reaching flag is set to $ FF. (Hexadecimal notation) is set (step S294), and the process proceeds to step S295. The 6000 arrival flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  The counting means 114a clears the total payout number (the oldest payout number for the 400 games) of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is set to 0 (step S295). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a calculates the number of consecutive payouts (the oldest number of consecutive payouts for 400 games) for the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The value is cleared to 0 (step S296). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a clears the number of bonuses to be paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. To 0 (step S297). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the main processing in FIG.

2.3.1. 400 Update Processing The 400 update processing (steps S271, S273, and S276) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a obtains the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer (step S311), adds the winning number in the current game to the value of the obtained RWM address (step S312), and performs the game information counting process of FIG. Return to the processing procedure.

  However, the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer is the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. 9 in the 400 update process related to the total payout number in step S271. In the 400 update process relating to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in step S273, the consecutive combination of the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. This is the address of the storage area where the number of articles to be paid is stored. In the 400 update process relating to the number of articles to be paid out in step S276, the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. This is the address of the storage area in which the number of the paid-out articles is stored.

2.3.2. Game Number Update Processing The game number update processing (steps S278 and S280) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the game number updating process relating to the total game number in step 278, 4 bytes of the total cumulative game number in FIG. 9 are to be updated, and in the game number updating process relating to the advantageous section game number in step S280, FIG. 4 bytes of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games are to be updated.

  The counting unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S331). Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the update result of the lower 2 bytes (that is, the value of the updated lower 2 bytes) is 0 (step S332). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S332), the process returns to the game information totalizing process of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S332), since the carry has occurred, the counting unit 114a sets the upper 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated. An update process of adding 1 to the byte value is performed (step S333), and the process proceeds to step S334.

  Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the update result of the upper 2 bytes (that is, the value of the updated upper 2 bytes) is 0 (step S334). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S334), the processing returns to the processing procedure of the game information totalizing processing in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S334), the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of 4 bytes before the update exceeds the maximum value 2 ³² -1 that can be represented by 4 bytes. Therefore, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total game number upper limit flag (step S335). The total game number upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  Subsequent to step S335, the tallying unit 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in each of the first to fourth bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S336), and performs the game information tallying process of FIG. Return to the processing procedure.

  However, since the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in the same subroutine, this subroutine can be used even if the model does not have a function related to the advantageous section. The “game number updating process” is executed. On the other hand, if the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in separate subroutines, if the model does not have the function related to the advantageous section, The subroutine for the number-of-games update process relating to the number of advantageous section games is not executed, resulting in a so-called “unused program”. However, as in the present embodiment, the number-of-games updating process relating to the total number of games and the number-of-games updating process relating to the number of advantageous sections are performed in the same subroutine. Even if the model does not have a program, the program does not become an “unused program”, and even if the model has a different performance, the program can be diverted, and the burden on development can be reduced.

  Also, in the number-of-games updating process relating to the advantageous section number of games, a processing step of setting the total number-of-games upper limit flag is included. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set, and $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set to the total game number upper limit flag in the game number update process related to the number of advantageous section games.

2.3.3. 6000 Update Process The 6000 update process (steps S285, S286, and S287) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the 6000 update process relating to the total payout number in step S285, the RWM addresses of the storage area (2 bytes) of the total payout number in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 9 are sequentially added. The RWM address is the RWM address, and the RWM address in the storage area (3 bytes) of the total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9 is the augmented address. Further, in the 6000 update process related to the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in step S286, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The added RWM address is in order, and the RWM address in the storage area (3 bytes) of the consecutive PS payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 9 is the added address. Further, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of bonus articles to be paid in step S287, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of bonus articles to be paid in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The added RWM address is used, and the RWM address in the storage area (3 bytes) of the number of paid-out articles of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. 9 is the added address.

  The counting means 114a clears the 3 bytes of the augmented RWM address and sets the value to 0 (step S351).

  Since the accumulation target is fifteen periods from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15, the counting means 114a sets the number of repetitions to fifteen, and sets the number of repetitions to fifteen. The address of the storage area of P1 is set as the added RWM address (step S352).

  Then, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of 2 bytes of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S353). Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result has been carried (that is, whether or not a carry has occurred) (step S354). Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S354), the process proceeds to step S356. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is a carry-on (YES in step S354), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the value of the third byte of the augmented RWM address, thereby adding the value of the third byte of the augmented RWM address. Update (step S355) and proceed to step S356.

  In step S356, the tallying unit 114a updates the added RWM address. Here, the addition RWM address is updated, for example, so that the addition target is updated in the next period.

  Subsequent to step S356, the counting means 114a subtracts 1 from the number of repetitions (step S357), and determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step S358). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S358), the process returns to step S353 because the accumulation process from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 has not been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S358), the accumulation process from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has been completed, and thus the game information totaling process in FIG. Return to the processing procedure. In this way, the values from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period are accumulated, and the accumulation result is stored in the accumulated PS.

2.3.4. Cumulative Update Processing The cumulative update processing (steps S289, S290, S291) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a acquires the RWM address (addition RWM address) corresponding to the ring pointer (step S371). However, as the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer, in the cumulative update processing relating to the total payout number in step S289, the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Of the storage area (2 bytes) is obtained, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out in step S290, the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is obtained, the address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the period is acquired. In the cumulative update process for the number of bonuses to be paid out in step S291, the first period P1 to the first period in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of paid-out articles in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the fifteenth period P15 is obtained.

  Subsequent to step S371, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the add-on RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the add-on RWM address (step S372). However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number in step S289, the lower 2 bytes of the total payout number of the total cumulative number in FIG. 9 are the lower 2 bytes of the RWM address to be added, and are related to the continuous payout number in step S290. In the cumulative update process, the lower two bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses of the total bonuses in FIG. 9 are the lower two bytes of the RWM address to be added. The lower 2 bytes of the total cumulative number of the paid-out articles are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address.

  Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S372 is a carry, that is, whether or not a carry has occurred (step S373). When it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S373), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information totalization processing in FIG. On the other hand, when the calculation result is determined to be a carry-on (YES in step S373), the counting means 114a updates the augmented RWM address (step S374). However, in the cumulative update process relating to the total payout number in step S289, the updated RWM address to be added is the address of the upper two bytes of the total payout number in FIG. 9 and the continuous payout number in step S290. 9 is the address of the upper two bytes of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses in FIG. 9, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses in the step S291, the cumulative total of FIG. This is the address of the upper two bytes of the payout number.

  Then, the counting means 114a updates the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding 1 to the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S375), and the update result in step S375 is 0. It is determined whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (step S376). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S376), the process returns to the processing procedure of the game information totalizing processing in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the update result is 0 (YES in step S376), the result of adding the 2-byte value of the added RWM to the 4-byte value of the added RWM address before the update is the maximum value of 4 bytes. Since it exceeds 2 ³² −1, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total payout upper limit flag (step S377). The total payout upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear. Then, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in each of the first to fourth bytes to be updated of the RWM 65 (step S378), and the processing procedure of the game information tallying process of FIG. Return to

2.4. Medal payout processing The medal payout processing (step S212) in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control unit 110 determines whether or not there is a payout of medals (step S401). When it is determined that there is no payout of medals (NO in step S401), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a medal payout (YES in step S401), the payout control unit 110 determines whether the number of credit medals is 50 (step S402). If it is determined that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the process proceeds to step S408.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of credit medals is 50 (YES in step S402), the specific event detection unit 112 sets a determination time of a payout game medal expiration error (E3 error) (step S403). If the payout is not made even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the counting of the determination time (time counting) for determining that the medals in the hopper unit 43 are empty is started.

  The payout control unit 110 performs rotation control for starting rotation of the hopper motor 57 of the hopper unit 43 (step S404).

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the determination time of the payout game medal running out error (E3 error) has elapsed (step S405). When it is determined that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the process proceeds to step S410.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination time has not elapsed (NO in step S405), the payout control unit 110 determines whether one medal has been paid out (step S406). In this case, whether or not one medal has been paid out is detected by the payout sensor 54 of the hopper unit 43. If it is determined that one medal has been paid out (YES in step S406), the process proceeds to the next step S407, and it is determined that one medal has not been paid out (NO in step S406). Then, the process returns to step S404.

  In step S407, the payout control unit 110 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed. If it is determined that the payout of medals has been completed (YES in step S407), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main process in FIG. 21 and it is determined that payout of medals has not been completed (NO in step S407). Then, the process returns to step S403.

  When it is determined in the determination processing in step S402 that the number of credit medals is less than 50 (NO in step S402), the payout control unit 110 adds one to the number of credit medals (storage number) (step S408). . As a result, the number of credit medals (stored number) displayed on the payout display 46 increases by one.

  Subsequent to step S408, the payout control unit 110 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (step S409). When it is determined that the payout of the medals is completed (YES in step S409), the process returns to the processing procedure of the main processing in FIG. 21 and when it is determined that the payout of the medals is not completed (NO in step S409). , And returns to step S402.

  When it is determined in the determination processing in step S405 that the determination time has elapsed (YES in step S405), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an error code “E3” (step S410). Then, the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 20 is performed by the game stop means 113 or the like (step S411), and the process returns to step S403.

3. Timer Interrupt Processing The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the timer interrupt process in FIG. 30 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  First, a phase output process is performed on each of the stepping motors as the left, middle, and right reel drive motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (step S431). Specifically, excitation data for rotating the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is output to each of the stepping motors.

  Command transmission processing is performed from the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub-control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71 (step S432). Specifically, this command is a command transmission process from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 which is normally transmitting, and is actually transmitted from the sub control command transmission unit 111 to the sub control command reception unit 201. .

  In the power supply unit including the power switch 50a and the like, it is determined whether or not the power is turned off (the power is cut off, that is, the power supply is stopped) (step S433). If it is determined that the power has been turned off (YES in step S433), a power cutoff process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 31 is performed (step S434), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  If it is determined in the determination process in step S433 that the power has not been turned off (NO in step S433), a ramp process is performed (step S435). Although not particularly shown, this lamp is a bet number display lamp, a re-game display lamp, or the like, and is controlled by the main CPU 61.

  Then, port input processing is performed (step S436). This port input processing is performed by a sensor for the main CPU 61 (the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48, the payout sensor 54 and the overflow sensor 57a of the hopper unit 43, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L and 21M). , 21R, etc.).

  Thereafter, a use area outside interrupt process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 33, is performed (step S437).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a transmission command for transmission from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S438). If it is determined that there is no transmission command (NO in step S438), the process proceeds to step S440. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a transmission command (YES in step S438), the set transmission command (input abnormality in steps S564 and S570 described later in detail, dispensing abnormality in step S603, door in step S635). The transmission process of (state) is performed (step S439), and the process proceeds to step S440.

  In step S440, it is determined whether or not there is error data. This error data is a flag for the main CPU 61 to report an error (shift to error processing). When the error data is set (turned on), the main CPU 61 shifts to error processing. Things. Specifically, it is set in steps S572, S574, S607, S611, and S622 described later.

  When it is determined that the error data is set (is in the ON state) (YES in step S440), the error processing described in detail with reference to FIG. 20 is performed by the game stop unit 113 or the like (step S441). The timer interrupt processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the error data is not set (not in the ON state) (NO in step S440), a medal insertion determination is performed (step S442), and a medal payout determination is performed (step S443). A timer update process is performed (step S444), and a port output process is performed (step S445). Then, an external signal output process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32 is performed (step S446).

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 determines the ratio display 69 (FIGS. 46 to 48) in step S536 in FIG. 33, which will be described later, and the like. The display of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is controlled using the set values of the first place and the first place (step S447). Then, control processing of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R (turning drum) is performed (step S448).

3.1. The power interruption process (step S434) in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power interruption process in FIG. 31 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  A stack pointer is set (step S471). This holds the address of the most recently referenced position in a memory area called a stack. Subsequent to step S471, the power cut flag is set (step S472). A predetermined numerical value is stored. Subsequent to step S472, a checksum value is set (step S473). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the timer interruption processing of FIG.

3.2. External Signal Output Processing The external signal output processing (step S446) of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The external output signal control means 119 sets the output signal of the first signal line corresponding to the terminal (see FIG. 68) having the terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 (step S501). A signal is output from the signal line. Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 sets an output signal of the second signal line corresponding to the terminal (see FIG. 68) having the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 (step S502). , A signal is output from the second signal line. However, the output signal from the first signal line is a medal insertion signal, and the output signals from the second signal line are a medal payout signal, an ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal. Note that details of the processing contents of steps S501 and S502 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, and details of the processing contents in the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control unit 119 determines whether the door (specifically, the front door 5) is open, that is, whether the door sensor 58 is OFF (step S503).

  When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the closed state (NO in step S503), the process proceeds to step S505. On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 5 is open (YES in step S503), the external output signal control unit 119 sets an external signal 5 output hold timer (step S504), and proceeds to step S505. Specifically, the count (time measurement) of the external signal 5 output hold timer is started. Here, the "output hold timer" is a timer for continuously outputting a predetermined signal when the door (front door 5) is opened or a predetermined error occurs. Specifically, for example, when the door (front door 5) is opened, a timer is set for 3 seconds from when the door is opened. Is set so that the signal does not turn off unless the time of the timer has elapsed. Thus, even if the state immediately shifts from the open state to the closed state, the state that the door (front door 5) is once opened can be reliably output to the outside. Specifically, this signal output is output to the hall computer managed by the hall manager of the game hall by the external centralized terminal board 59. The “hold timer” of the external signal 4 output hold timer, which will be described later, also has a similar function.

  In step S505, the external output signal control means 119 determines whether or not the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating. When it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S505), the external signal 5 is turned on (step S506), and the process proceeds to step S507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 5 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S505), the external signal 5 is turned off (step S507), and the process proceeds to step S508. The external signal 5 corresponds to the door opening signal in FIG.

  The external output signal control unit 119 determines whether or not the specific condition has been met (step S508). Here, matching with this specific condition is, specifically, (1) E0 error, (2) E1 error, (3) E2 error, (4) E7 error, (5) EA error, (6) E0 This means that one of (1) to (8) of the error determination flag on, (7) E2 error determination flag on, and (8) EA error determination flag on is applicable. Here, (1) to (5) are based on a regular error signal indicating a state in which an error corresponding to the error code has occurred, and the “error determination flag” in (6) to (8) is a so-called reservation. A flag (suspension flag).

  When it is determined that none of the specific conditions is satisfied (NO in step S508), the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, when it is determined that one of the specific conditions is satisfied (YES in step S508), the external output signal control unit 119 sets an external signal 4 output hold timer (step S509), and proceeds to step S510. . Specifically, the count (time measurement) of the external signal 4 output hold timer is started.

  In step S510, the external output signal control unit 119 determines whether the external signal 4 output suspension timer is operating. When it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is operating (YES in step S510), the external signal 4 is turned on (step S511), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 4 output hold timer is not operating (NO in step S510), the external signal 4 is turned off (step S512), and the procedure returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG. Note that the external signal 4 corresponds to the security signal in FIG.

3.3. Out-of-Use-area Interruption Processing The out-of-use-area interruption processing (step S437) of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the out-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. 33 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  Monitoring processing of the selector sensor (specifically, the insertion sensor 53) of the medal selector 48, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 34, 35, and 36, is performed (step S531). Subsequently, monitoring processing of the payout sensor 54, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, is performed (step S532). Subsequently, monitoring processing of a door (specifically, the front door 5), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, is performed (step S533).

  Then, a ratio display-related timer update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 40, is performed (step S534). Subsequently, each ratio calculation described later in detail with reference to FIG. 41 is performed (step S535). Subsequently, each ratio display setting described later in detail with reference to FIG. 46 is performed (step S536). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG.

3.3.1 Selector Sensor Monitoring Process The selector sensor monitoring process (step S531) in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34, 35, and 36.

  The specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the time of the selector sensor C is over (step S561). This is for causing an E0 error (game medal error) if the selector sensor C keeps the ON state for 1.6 seconds. When it is determined that the time of the selector sensor C is not over (NO in step S561), the process proceeds to step S565.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time of the selector sensor C is over (YES in step S561), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the E0 error flag as an error determination flag (step S562). Then, the E0 error flag and the error determination flag are turned on (ON). This error determination flag is a flag that reserves (suspends) the occurrence of an error and the transition to error processing. Note that, based on the error determination flag, a transmission command (to be described later) such as “input abnormality” or “payout abnormality” is transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

  Subsequent to step S562, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S563). When it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S563), the process proceeds to step S565. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S563), the specific event detection unit 112 transmits the transmission command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Is set as "medal insertion failure" (step S564), and the process proceeds to the next step S565.

  In step S565, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S565). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S565), the process proceeds to step S567. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S565), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether a medal is being paid out. (Step S566). When it is determined that the medal is being paid out (YES in step S566), the process proceeds to step S567, and when it is determined that the medal is not paid out (NO in step S566), the process proceeds to step S571.

  In step S567, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the selector sensor A or B as the input sensor 53 is in the ON state. If it is determined that none of the selector sensors A and B is in the ON state (NO in step S567), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector sensor A or B is on (YES in step S567), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an EA error (sensor error) flag as an error determination flag (step S568). The error determination flag is a flag that reserves the transition to error processing when an error occurs.

  Subsequent to step S568, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S569). When it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S569), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S569), the specific event detection unit 112 transmits the transmission command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Is set to "medal throwing abnormality" (step S570), and the procedure returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

  In step S571, the specific event detection means 112 determines whether or not the E0 error (game medal error) flag is on. When it is determined that the E0 error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S571), the error determination flag of the E0 error is cleared, and in step S572, the specific event detection unit 112 outputs the error data by the error code “E0”. Set (error data flag is set to ON). The setting of the error data means that the flag of the error data is turned on, and that the flag for shifting to the error processing in the main CPU 61 is turned on. Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the E0 error flag is not on (NO in step S571), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the EA error (sensor error) flag is on (step S573). . When it is determined that the EA error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S573), the error determination flag of the EA error is cleared, and in step S574, the specific event detection unit 112 outputs the error data by the error code “EA”. Set (error data flag is set to ON). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the EA error flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S573), the specific event detecting unit 112 determines whether the cancel coil is in the ON state (step S575). Although not shown in the drawing, the cancel coil in the medal selector 48 inserts the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 into the hopper unit 43 to be a credit medal, or discharges the medal to the medal receiver 41. This is for switching the medal path to be performed. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 are adopted as credit medals when the cancel coil is on, and are discharged to the medal receiver 41 when not on.

  When it is determined in the determination processing of step S575 that the cancel coil is not in the ON state (NO in step S575), the process proceeds to step S567 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cancel coil is in the ON state (YES in step S575), the specific event detection unit 112 determines that the timing chart of the selector sensor B falls (the state transitions from the ON state to the OFF state). It is determined whether or not there is (step S576). The falling state in the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which a medal is passing by in front of the selector sensor B in the passage and is about to pass.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S576 that the vehicle is in the falling state (YES in step S576), the process proceeds to step S577. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the falling state (NO in step S576), the process proceeds to step S579.

  In step S577, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the passing order of the medals is abnormal. However, since the selector sensors A, B, and C are arranged so as to detect the passing order of the medals in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B, when the detection is not performed in that order. Are determined to be abnormal.

  If it is determined in the determination processing in step S577 that the passing order of the medals is abnormal (YES in step S577), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S577), the specific event detecting unit 112 clears (initializes) the EA timer (step S578), and interrupts the outside of the use area in FIG. Return to the processing procedure.

  In step S579, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in a falling state (a state in which the selector sensor A transitions from an on state to an off state). The falling state of the timing chart of the selector sensor A means a state in which the medals pass in front of the selector sensor A and are about to pass.

  If it is determined in the determination processing in step S579 that the state is not the falling state (NO in step S579), the process proceeds to step S581 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the falling state (YES in step S579), the process proceeds to step S580.

  In step S580, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether the passing order of the medals is abnormal. When it is determined that the passing order of the medals is abnormal (YES in step S580), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. 34, and when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S580), the process of FIG. Proceed to step S585.

  In step S581 in FIG. 36, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in a rising state (a transition state from an off state to an on state). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor B means a state in which a medal has shifted before the selector sensor B in the passage.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S581 that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is in the rising state (YES in step S581), the process proceeds to step S582. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor B is not in the rising state (NO in step S581), the process proceeds to step S584.

  In step S582, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the passing order of the medals is abnormal. When it is determined that the passing order of the medals is abnormal (YES in step S582), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S582), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an EA timer (step S583), and the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. Return to

  In step S584, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in a rising state (step S584). The rising state of the timing chart of the selector sensor A means a state in which a medal has shifted before the selector sensor A in the passage.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S584 that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is not in the rising state (NO in step S584), the process proceeds to step S585. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing chart of the selector sensor A is in the rising state (YES in step S584), the process proceeds to step S586.

  In step S585, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the EA timer has reached 0 after a predetermined period of time (countdown, subtraction) has elapsed. When it is determined that the EA timer has become 0 (YES in step S585), the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. 34, and when it is determined that the EA timer has not become 0 (NO in step S585), FIG. The procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside use area interrupt processing.

  In step S586, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not 500 ms or more has elapsed since the selector sensor C was turned off. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied (YES in step S586), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (NO in step S586), the process proceeds to step S587.

  In step S587, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the passing order of the medals is abnormal. When it is determined that the passing order of medals is abnormal based on the detection order of the selector sensors A, B, and C (YES in step S587), the process proceeds to step S572 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing order of the medals is not abnormal (NO in step S587), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an EA timer (step S588), and the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. Return to

3.3.2 Payout Sensor Monitoring Process The payout sensor monitoring process (step S532) in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  The specific event detection unit 112 determines whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S601). If it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating, that is, if it is determined that all reels have stopped rotating (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S604. . On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, the specific event detecting unit 112 determines whether the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. When it is determined that neither the payout sensors A and B are in the ON state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is on (YES in step S602), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the “payout abnormality” of the medal in the transmission command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Then (step S603), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether or not the E2 error flag as an error determination flag is on. When it is determined that the E2 error flag is in the ON state (YES in step S604), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the E2 error flag is not in the on state, that is, in the off state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S605, the specific event detecting unit 112 sets the E2 error flag as an error determination flag. That is, the error determination flag is set to the ON state according to the ON state of the E2 error flag.

  Subsequent to step S605, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S606). When it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S606), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating, that is, is stopped (NO in step S606), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the error determination flag of the E2 error. Is cleared, the error code E2 is set to the error data used by the main CPU 61 (step S607), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process of FIG.

  In step S608, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the determination time of the error code E7 has just elapsed. When it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has just elapsed (YES in step S608), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination time of the error code E7 has not elapsed (NO in step S608), the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S609, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the hopper unit 43 is being driven. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hopper motor 57 is rotating. When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S609), the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S610, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether or not the payout sensor B is on. If it is determined that the payout sensor B is in the ON state (YES in step S610), the process proceeds to step S612. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor B is not in the ON state (NO in step S610), the specific event detection unit 112 sets error data used for the main CPU 61 with the error code “E7” (step S611). Returning to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

  In step S612, the specific event detecting means 112 determines whether the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state. If it is determined that the payout sensors A and B are not in the ON state (NO in step S612), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor A or B is in the ON state (YES in step S612), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, the hopper motor. It is determined whether or not 57 is being driven for rotation (step S613).

  When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven in the determination processing in step S613 (NO in step S613), the process proceeds to step S605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S613), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the payout sensor A is in the rising state (transition state from the off state to the on state). Is determined (step S614). When it is determined that it is in the rising state (YES in step S614), the specific event detection unit 112 sets the E1 timer (starts the countdown (time measurement) of the E1 timer) (step S615), and uses the area shown in FIG. The procedure returns to the external interrupt processing procedure. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the rising state (NO in step S614), the process proceeds to step S616 in FIG.

  In step S616 of FIG. 38, the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the hopper unit 43 is being driven, specifically, whether the hopper motor 57 is being driven to rotate. If it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is not being driven (NO in step S616), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG.

  When it is determined that the hopper unit 43 is being driven (YES in step S616), the specific event detection unit 112 determines whether both the payout sensors A and B are off after the elapse of the determination time of the error code E7. Is determined (step S617). If both are determined to be in the OFF state (YES in step S617), the process proceeds to step S622. On the other hand, when both are not in the off state, that is, when it is determined that at least one is in the on state (NO in step S617), the specific event detection unit 112 elapses (counts down (subtracts)) a predetermined time by the E1 timer. It is determined whether the remaining time is 0 (step S618). When it is determined that the E1 timer has become 0 (YES in step S618), the process proceeds to step S622.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the E1 timer is not 0 (NO in step S618), the specific event detecting unit 112 determines whether the payout sensor A is in a falling state (a state in which the payout sensor A shifts from an on state to an off state). It is determined whether or not it is (step S619). If it is determined that it is not in the falling state (NO in step S619), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the falling state (YES in step S619), the specific event detecting unit 112 clears (initializes) the E1 timer (step S620). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 detects the falling of the payout sensor B from the rising state of the payout sensor A (state of transition from the off state to the on state) to the falling state (state of transitioning from the on state to the off state). It is determined whether or not a state (a state of transition from the on state to the off state) has occurred (step S621). When it is determined that the falling state has occurred (YES in step S621), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the falling state has not occurred (NO in step S621), the process proceeds to step S622.

  In step S622, the specific event detecting means 112 sets error data used by the main CPU 61 based on the error code "E1" (step S622). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

3.3.3 Door Monitoring Process The door monitoring process (step S533) in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the door monitoring process of FIG. 39 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  It is determined by the monitoring hold timer of the door (front door 5) whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S631). If it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed (NO in step S631), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in step S631), the state of the door (the front door 5) is acquired (step S632).

  Subsequent to step S632, it is determined whether the state of the acquired door (front door 5) is different from the previously acquired door (front door 5) information (step S633). If it is determined that the information does not differ from the information (NO in step S633), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the information is different from the information (YES in step S633), the state of the door (front door 5) is updated (step S634). Then, the state of the door (front door 5) is set in the transmission command to be transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S635). Then, a door (front door 5) monitoring hold timer is set (step S636). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG.

3.3.4 Ratio Display-Related Timer Update Process The ratio display-related timer update process (step S534) in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the ratio blink timer (step S651). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the update result (the value of the updated ratio blinking timer) is equal to or greater than 0 (step S652). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S652), the process proceeds to step S654. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S652), the display control means 115 inverts the ratio blinking flag and sets the ratio blinking timer to the set value of the ratio blinking timer in step S54 in FIG. Is set (step S653), and the process proceeds to step S654. The processing from step S651 to step S653 is executed every time the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the ratio blink flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.3 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the ratio blink timer. Switch between. Thus, the blinking display of the ratio display 69 can be controlled.

  In step S654, the display control unit 115 performs an update process of decrementing the display switching timer by 1 (step S654). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the update result is 0 or more (Step S655). If it is determined that the update result of the display switching timer (the updated value of the display switching timer) is equal to or greater than 0 (YES in step S655), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S655), the display control unit 115 updates the ratio display number and sets the display switching timer to the set value of the display switching timer in step S53 in FIG. Is set (step S656), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG. In the update process of the ratio display number, the ratio display number is updated while repeating 0 to 4 in order, such as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 1,. The ratio display number 0 is the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio display number 1 is the display item (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games), and the ratio display number 2 is the display item (3) the character The ratio (6000 games) and the ratio display number 3 correspond to the display item (4) the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the ratio display number 4 corresponds to the display item (5) the accessory ratio (total) (see FIG. 11). Then, the processing from step S654 to step S656 is executed every time the interruption processing for out-of-use area in the timer interruption processing is performed, and the ratio display number is updated, for example, every 5 seconds according to the set value of the display switching timer. . Thereby, the display contents of the ratio display 69 are as follows: display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative), display item (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games), display item (3) character ratio (6000 games) The display item (4) is switched while repeating in the order of the continuous accessory ratio (total) and (5) the accessory ratio (total).

3.3.5 Calculation of Each Ratio The calculation of each ratio in FIG. 33 (step S535) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The calculating unit 114b determines whether or not the number of times of ratio calculation is 0 (step S671). If it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is 0 (YES in step S671), all types of ratios corresponding to the number of ratio calculations finally set in the game information tallying process of FIG. 24 are calculated. Therefore, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG. That is, when the number of ratio calculations is finally set to 1 in the game information totaling process in FIG. 24, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is already calculated, and when the number of ratio calculations is set to 5, The ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) have already been calculated.

  If it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is not 0 (NO in step S671), the arithmetic unit 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of ratio calculations (step S672). Subsequently, the calculating unit 114b acquires data corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation frequency from the ratio calculation data table (step S673).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the ratio calculation data table associates “ratio calculation count”, “divisor information”, “divisor byte number”, “dividend information”, and “dividend byte number”. It is a table to be stored.

  Then, as the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “0”, the divisor information “total games” (total total number of games in FIG. 9), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “benefit section games” (The total cumulative number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9) and the byte number “4” of the dividend are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “4” of the dividend obtained for the number of repetitions in the 100-times processing described later with reference to FIG. 43 is set.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1”, the divisor information “total payout number in the latest 6000 game” (total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), the divisor byte number “3”, and the dividend information “last 6000” The “number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in the game” (the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) and the dividend “3” are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “3” of the dividend obtained is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-times processing described later with reference to FIG. 43.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “2”, the divisor information “total payout number in the latest 6000 game” (total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), the divisor number of bytes “3”, and the dividend information “last 6000” The number of bonuses paid out in the game ”(the number of bonuses paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) and the number of bytes“ 3 ”of the dividend are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “3” of the dividend obtained is set as the number of repetitions in the 100-times processing described later with reference to FIG. 43.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “3”, information of the divisor is “total number of payouts in the cumulative game” (total number of payouts in the cumulative total in FIG. 9), the number of bytes of the divisor is “4”, and the information of the dividend is “ The “number of consecutive bonuses delivered” (the total number of consecutive bonuses delivered in FIG. 9) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “4” of the dividend obtained for the number of repetitions in the 100-times processing described later with reference to FIG. 43 is set.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “4”, the divisor information “total payout number in the cumulative game” (total payout number in FIG. 9), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “the cumulative game The "number of paid-out articles" (total number of paid-out articles in FIG. 9) and the number of bytes "4" of the dividend are stored in association with each other. Then, the number of bytes “4” of the dividend obtained for the number of repetitions in the 100-times processing described later with reference to FIG. 43 is set.

  Subsequent to step S673, the calculating means 114b performs a ratio calculation process for calculating a ratio corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation count, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 42 (step S674). However, the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number “0” is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1” is the continuous character ratio (6000 games), and the ratio calculation number “2”. Is the accessory ratio (6000 games), the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number “3” is the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the ratio corresponding to the ratio calculation number “4” is the accessory ratio. (Cumulative). This ratio calculation processing is intended to reduce the calculation load when the divisor and the dividend can exceed 2 bytes. Therefore, the ratio calculation processing is applied when the divisor and the dividend can exceed 2 bytes. Is preferred.

  Following step S674, the calculating means 114b sets the value stored in the ratio display work area (described later) by the ratio calculation process of step S674 in the ratio buffer corresponding to the number of ratio calculations (step S675), and FIG. The procedure returns to the processing procedure of the outside use area interrupt processing. However, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “0” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 9). The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1” is a buffer for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9). The ratio buffer corresponding to the number of times “2” is a buffer for the accessory ratio (6000 games) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “3” is a buffer for a continuous character ratio (cumulative) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total continuous character ratio in FIG. 9). The ratio buffer corresponding to “4” is a buffer for the accessory ratio (total) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total accessory ratio in FIG. 9).

  Here, before explaining the details of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 41 using the flowchart of FIG. 42 and the like, the outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. A specific example will be described. For bits, the least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and for the bytes, the least significant byte is described as the first byte.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 50, both the divisor A and the dividend B are 4-byte information, the divisor A is $ 000B71B0 in hexadecimal notation (750000 in decimal notation), and the dividend B is hexadecimal notation. Is $ 000130B0 (78000 in decimal notation). However, as shown in FIG. 50, the divisor is stored in the 1st to 4th bytes of the divisor RWM using the arithmetic work area of the 1st to 5th bytes and the A register (only 1 bit for assisting the arithmetic). ing. The dividend RWM in which the dividend is stored is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the divisor A to the dividend B is calculated by dividing the dividend B by the divisor A and multiplying the division result (B ÷ A) by 100 (B ÷). A × 100). In the present embodiment, taking into account that the arithmetic processing of the decimal point is complicated, the dividend B is calculated by multiplying the dividend B by 100 and dividing the result (B × 100) by 100 by the divisor A (B × 100 ÷ A). .

  First, the process of multiplying the dividend B by 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 shows how to write 78000 × 100 in decimal.

  The value of the first byte of the dividend B, $ B0 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 44C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the upper byte $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the H register. Then, the lower byte $ C0 (in hexadecimal notation) is stored in the L register. Then, $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register is stored in the D register, and $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register is stored in the first byte of the operation work area.

  Subsequently, the value of the second byte of the dividend B, $ 30 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 12C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the upper byte $ 12 (hexadecimal notation) Is stored in the H register, and $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Then, $ C0 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 44 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 04 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the second byte of the operation work area. Then, $ 01 (hexadecimal notation) of the carry is added to $ 12 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register, and the addition result # 13 (hexadecimal notation) is stored in the D register.

  Subsequently, the value of the third byte of the dividend B, $ 01 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 0064 (hexadecimal notation) of the upper byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) Is stored in the H register, and $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Then, $ 64 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 13 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 77 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the third byte of the operation work area. Then, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register is stored in the D register.

  Then, the value of the fourth byte of the dividend B, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation), is multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), and the multiplication result $ 0000 (hexadecimal notation) of the upper byte $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) Is stored in the H register and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte is stored in the L register. Then, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the L register and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the D register are added, and $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the lower byte of the addition result is added to the fourth byte of the operation work area. Then, $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) of the H register is stored in the D register.

  Then, since all bytes of the dividend B are multiplied by $ 64 (hexadecimal notation), the value of the D register is stored in the fifth byte of the arithmetic work area.

  As described above, in the case of multiplication of a hexadecimal number, the calculation is performed in units of 1 byte in the same way as the decimal number in the same handwriting system. Multiply 100 times (＄ in hexadecimal notation) by multiplying 100 times (multiplying by 64 in hexadecimal notation) in order from the first byte of dividend B, and shifting and adding the operation result of 2 bytes by 1 byte. 64 multiplications). At this time, the maximum calculation result is $ FF x $ 64 = $ 639C (in hexadecimal notation), so that there is no overflow when adding the carry. The addition result is stored in the operation work area in order from the first byte, and the operation result is the number of bytes obtained by adding 1 to the number of operation bytes.

  Next, a process of dividing a value (B × 100) obtained by multiplying the dividend B by 100 by the divisor A will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, in the case where the dividend B is equal to or less than the divisor A, when the dividend B is multiplied by 100 and the result of multiplying by 100 (B × 100) is divided by the divisor A, the quotient always becomes 100 (decimal notation) or less. Therefore, in binary notation, the quotient is a one-byte value and the seventh bit is always 0. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52, in decimal notation, the hundreds place, tens place, and ones place (that is, the “*” part in FIG. 52) may be calculated as the quotient value. In binary notation, 7 bits from the 6th bit to the 0th bit (that is, the “*” part in FIG. 52) may be calculated as the quotient value. More specifically, when calculating the value of the quotient in decimal notation, when calculating the value of the quotient in binary notation, similarly to calculating from the hundredth place and calculating to the first place, The calculation may be performed from the 6th bit to the 0th bit.

  When calculating the value of the hundredth place of the quotient in decimal notation, “78000” is extracted as a subtraction determination part as shown in FIG. 53, and as shown in FIG. 54, the subtraction determination part “78000” is divisor “750000”. The value of the hundredth place of the quotient is obtained by comparing with.

  Similarly, when calculating the value of the sixth bit of the quotient in binary notation, as shown in FIG. 53, a part necessary for calculating the value of the sixth bit of the quotient is a subtraction determination part (A register Shifts the bit values from the 5th byte to the 1st byte of the arithmetic work area to the left (upper bit side) by 2 bits to shift the least significant bit of the arithmetic work area from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte. I do. As a result, the subtraction determination portion (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the sixth bit of the fifth byte of the operation work area to the sixth byte of the first byte of the operation work area before the 2-bit shift. It is up to the bit.

  However, the result of multiplying the 4-byte maximum value $ FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal notation) by 100 is $ 63FFFFFF9C (hexadecimal notation), which is 01000011 11111111 11111111 11111111 10011100 in binary notation. As described above, since the most significant bit of the fifth byte in binary notation is 0, even when shifting from the fifth byte to the first byte of the arithmetic work area by two bits, only the least significant bit of the A register is shifted. If used, the information of the result of multiplying the dividend B by 100 (B × 100) will not be lost.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 54, the subtraction determination part (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth to second bytes of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the sixth bit of the quotient. When subtraction is possible, “1” is used, and when subtraction is impossible, “0” is the sixth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 54, the subtraction determination part “0 00000000 00000001 11011100 00010011” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000001011 01110001 10110000”, and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes “1”, and “0” obtained by inverting the carry flag is stored in the sixth bit of the work area for ratio display as the value of the sixth bit of the quotient. If the subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination part (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) remains unchanged.

  If the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion, the carry flag becomes “0”, and “1” obtained by inverting the carry flag is set as the sixth bit value of the quotient, and the ratio display work area 6 is set. Store the bit number. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area is replaced with a value obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. Here, when calculating the tens place in decimal notation, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, an operation of lowering the tens place “0” of 7800000 is performed. Similarly, when calculating the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation, the operation of lowering the fifth bit of the dividend B × 100 is performed. Specifically, when calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation, a part necessary for calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient is subtracted and determined (the least significant bit of the A register and the In order to shift from the fifth byte to the second byte of the work area), the bit values from the fifth byte to the first byte of the operation work area are shifted one bit to the left (upper bit side). As a result, the subtraction determination portion (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the seventh bit of the fifth byte of the operation work area to the seventh byte of the first byte of the operation work area before one bit shift. It is up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55, the subtraction determination part (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor to calculate the fifth bit of the quotient. When subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and when subtraction is impossible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 55, the subtraction determination part “0 00000000 00000011 10111000 001011010” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000001011 01110001 1011100000”, and the divisor cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes “1”, and “0” obtained by inverting the carry flag is stored as the fifth bit value of the quotient in the fifth bit of the work area for ratio display. If the subtraction is not possible, the value of the subtraction determination part (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) remains unchanged.

  If the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part, the carry flag becomes “0”, and “1” obtained by inverting the carry flag is set as the fifth bit value of the quotient, and the value of the ratio display work area 5 is set. Store the bit number. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area is replaced with a value obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Similarly, the values of the fourth, third, second, first, and zeroth bits of the quotient are calculated.

  FIG. 56 shows the calculation result. In this way, shift processing (digit lowering processing) and subtraction determination are repeated seven times in total from the upper byte of the first byte of the operation work area, and the 0th bit is derived from the 6th bit of the quotient. Eventually, the value of the work area for ratio display becomes a quotient, and the value from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the calculation work area becomes a remainder.

  When the remainder is not 0, the result of the division is determined to be larger than the value of the quotient and smaller than the value obtained by adding 1 (a value in binary notation) to the quotient. When the remainder is 0, the result is divided. The result can be used to determine that it is the same as the value of the quotient.

  The divisor A is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, the dividend B is a value that can exceed 2 bytes, and when the value of the dividend B is equal to or less than the value of the divisor A, the calculating unit 114b calculates the divisor of the value of the dividend B It has a function of performing an operation for calculating a ratio (percentage) to the value of A, performs a multiplication process for multiplying the value of the dividend B by 100, and holds the result of the multiplication process (a value of B × 100) in an operation work area. When the value of the dividend B × 100 is divided by the value of the divisor A, a division process for calculating only the lower 7 bits as a quotient is performed, and the result of the division process (the value of B × 100 ÷ A) is used for ratio display. Keep in the work area. The arithmetic means 114b calculates, in the division process, each of the bit values from the 6th bit to the 0th bit in the lower 7 bits as 1 when the subtracted value is equal to or greater than the subtracted value, and calculates the bit value when the subtracted value is less than the subtracted value. Is calculated as 0. When the value of the divisor A is K (K is a natural number) bits, the subtraction value is a value represented by K bits from the (K−1) th bit to the 0th bit of the value of the divisor A, and is 6 bits. The subtracted value in the eye is a value represented by (K + 1) bits from the (K + 6) th bit to the sixth bit of the value of the dividend B × 100, and the subtracted value in the ith (i = 0 to 5) th bit If the value of the (i + 1) th bit in the result of dividing the value of the dividend B × 100 by the value of the divisor A is 0, the lower K bits of the subtraction value at the (i + 1) th bit are calculated. This is a value represented by (K + 1) bits with the i-th bit of the value of the dividend B × 100 as the least significant bit, while dividing the value of the dividend B × 100 by the value of the divisor A. When the value of the (i + 1) th bit in the division result is 1 Sets the lower K bits of the value obtained by subtracting the subtraction value from the subtraction value at the (i + 1) th bit as the upper K bits, and sets the ith bit of the value of the dividend B × 100 as the least significant bit (K + 1 ) Bits.

  Subsequently, an outline of the ratio calculation process (step S674) of FIG. 41 will be described using another specific example with reference to FIG. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57, the divisor A is 0 (decimal notation) and the dividend B is 0 (decimal notation).

  The result of multiplying the value of the dividend B, $ 00000000 (hexadecimal notation), by 100 is $ 00000000 (hexadecimal notation).

  First, the value of the sixth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. In the binary notation, when calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient, as shown in FIG. 57, a portion necessary for calculating the value of the 6th bit of the quotient is a subtraction judgment portion (the least significant bit of the A register is In order to shift from the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area), the bit values from the fifth byte to the first byte of the operation work area are shifted to the left (upper bit side) by two bits. As a result, the subtraction determination portion (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the sixth bit of the fifth byte of the operation work area to the sixth byte of the first byte of the operation work area before the 2-bit shift. It is up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination part (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) is compared with the divisor, and the sixth bit of the quotient is calculated. When subtraction is possible, “1” is used, and when subtraction is impossible, “0” is the sixth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination part “0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 000 000 000 000” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 000 000 000”, and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "0", and "1" with the carry flag inverted is stored as the sixth bit value of the quotient in the sixth bit of the work area for ratio display. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area is replaced with a value obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Next, the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation is calculated. When calculating the fifth bit of the quotient in binary notation, the part necessary to calculate the value of the fifth bit of the quotient is subtracted (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte of the operation work area). To the second byte), the bit values from the fifth byte to the first byte of the operation work area are shifted one bit to the left (upper bit side). As a result, the subtraction determination portion (from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the operation work area) is changed from the seventh bit of the fifth byte of the operation work area to the seventh byte of the first byte of the operation work area before one bit shift. It is up to the bit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the fifth bit of the quotient is calculated by comparing the subtraction determination portion (the least significant bit of the A register and the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area) with the divisor. When subtraction is possible, "1" is used, and when subtraction is impossible, "0" is the fifth bit of the quotient.

  In this specific example, as shown in FIG. 57, the subtraction determination part “0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 000 000 000” is compared with the divisor “00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 000 000 000”, and the divisor can be subtracted from the subtraction determination part. Becomes "0" and the carry flag is inverted and "1" is stored as the fifth bit value of the quotient in the fifth bit of the work area for ratio display. When the subtraction is possible, the value of the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area is replaced with a value obtained by subtracting the divisor value from the value of the subtraction determination part.

  Similarly, the values of the fourth, third, second, first, and zeroth bits of the quotient are calculated. As a result of this calculation, as shown in FIG. 57, the value of the quotient is 01111111 in binary notation, $ 7F in hexadecimal notation, and 127 in decimal notation. The remainder is 00000000 in binary notation, $ 00 in hexadecimal notation, and 0 in decimal notation.

  As described above, when the value of the dividend B is equal to or less than the value of the divisor A, considering that the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A is 100 or less in decimal notation, the quotient is calculated as shown in FIG. If the value exceeds 100 in decimal notation, the work area for ratio display is cleared and the value is set to 0.

3.3.5.1 Ratio Calculation Process The ratio calculation process (step S674) in FIG. 41 will be described with reference to FIG. However, if the number of ratio calculations is 0, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is calculated. If the number of ratio calculations is 1, the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is calculated. If the number of ratio calculations is 2, Is calculated as an accessory ratio (6000 games). If the number of ratio calculations is 3, a continuous accessory ratio (total) is calculated. If the ratio calculation number is 4, an accessory ratio (total) is calculated. You.

  The calculating means 114b clears the fifth byte of the calculation work area (see FIG. 50) and the work area for ratio display and sets the value to 0 (step S701).

  The arithmetic means 114b performs 100 times processing of the value (RWM value) of the RWM 65 corresponding to the information of the dividend obtained in step S673 of FIG. 41, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. S702). However, when the number of ratio calculations is 0, the value of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9 is multiplied by 100, and when the number of ratio calculations is 1, the value of the continuous PS payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. When the number of times of ratio calculation is 2, the value of the number of bonus articles to be paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9 is multiplied by 100. When the ratio is calculated by 100 and the number of times of calculation of the ratio is 4, the value of the total number of the bonus articles to be paid out in FIG. 9 is multiplied by 100.

  The calculation unit 114b obtains the first byte and the second byte of the RWM 65 corresponding to the information of the divisor obtained in step S673 of FIG. 41 (step S703). Then, the calculating means 114b determines whether or not the number of calculated bytes is 3 (step S704). In this embodiment, the number of operation bytes is three or four. When it is determined that the number of operation bytes is not 3, that is, the number of operation bytes is 4 (NO in step S704), the operation unit 114b acquires the fourth byte of the divisor RWM (step S705), and The third byte of the RWM is obtained (step S706), and the process proceeds to step S707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of operation bytes is 3 (YES in step S704), the operation unit 114b acquires the third byte of the divisor RWM (step S706), and proceeds to step S707.

  However, the divisor RWM is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games in FIG. 9 when the ratio calculation number is 0, and the total payout of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9 when the ratio calculation number is 1 in FIG. This is a 3-byte storage area for storing the number of sheets, and is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. 9 when the number of times of ratio calculation is 2, and is shown in FIG. This is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts of the total cumulative number of payouts. When the ratio calculation number is 4, it is a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts of the total total of FIG.

  The calculation means 114b sets 7 as the number of repetitions (step S707). The reason why the number of repetitions is set to 7 is as follows. In the ratio calculation, the value of the dividend is less than or equal to the value of the divisor, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the dividend by 100 is divided by the value of the divisor. Therefore, the value of the quotient becomes 100 or less in decimal notation, and the value of the quotient is expressed in binary notation. It can be represented by the lower 7 bits (7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit). Therefore, only the lower 7 bits from the 0th bit to the 6th bit in binary notation need be calculated as the quotient value.

  When the number of repetitions is 7 set in step S707, the arithmetic unit 114b shifts the data serving as the subtraction determination part from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the arithmetic work area. The shift process described in detail later is performed twice (steps S708 and S709). This is a process corresponding to a 2-bit shift in calculating the value of the sixth bit of the quotient in FIG.

  When the number of repetitions is 1 to 6 other than 7 set in step S707 (when it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 in step S718 to be described later), the arithmetic unit 114b converts the data serving as the subtraction determination portion into data. A shift process for shifting from the fifth byte to the second byte of the A register and the operation work area, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 44, is performed once (step S709). This is a process corresponding to a one-bit shift when calculating the value of the fifth bit of the quotient in FIG. 55, for example.

  Subsequent to step S709, the calculating unit 114b stores the number of repetitions and the divisor in the RWM 65 (step S710).

  Subsequent to step S710, the arithmetic means 114b calculates the divisor data (the fourth byte to the first byte of the divisor RWM) from the data of the subtraction determination portion (A register and data from the fifth byte to the second byte of the arithmetic work area). ) Is subtracted (step S711), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the number of bytes of the divisor is 3 bytes (for example, the total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), the value of the fourth byte of the divisor RWM is $ 00 (hexadecimal notation).

  In step S712, the calculation unit 114b determines whether the calculation result in step S711 is a carry-on (step S712). When it is determined that the calculation result is a carry (that is, when the data of the subtraction determination portion is not equal to or greater than the divisor data) (YES in step S712), the process proceeds to step S714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (that is, when the data in the subtraction determination portion is equal to or larger than the divisor data) (NO in step S712), the calculation unit 114b determines the calculation result in step S711 (the subtraction determination portion (The result obtained by subtracting the divisor data from the data of (1)) is set from the fifth byte to the second byte of the operation work area (step S713), and the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S714, the calculating means 114b inverts the carry flag. However, when the divisor data can be subtracted from the data in the subtraction determination portion (that is, when the data in the subtraction determination portion is equal to or greater than the divisor data), the carry flag value becomes 0, and the value obtained by inverting the carry flag value Becomes 1. When the divisor data cannot be subtracted from the subtraction determination portion data (that is, when the subtraction determination portion data is not equal to or greater than the divisor data), the carry flag value becomes 1, and the value obtained by inverting the carry flag value becomes It becomes 0.

  Subsequent to step S714, the arithmetic unit 114b rotates the 8 bits of the work area for ratio display to the left (upper bit side) by one bit, and stores the inverted value of the carry flag in the 0th bit (step S715). ). For example, when the number of repetitions is 7, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated 6 times from 6 to 1 and one bit to the left, and when the number of repetitions becomes 0, the ratio is displayed. Is stored in the sixth bit of the work area. Further, for example, when the number of repetitions is 6, the value stored in the 0th bit is rotated by one bit to the left, 5 times from 5 to 1, and when the number of repetitions reaches 0, the ratio is displayed. Is stored in the fifth bit of the work area.

  Subsequent to step S715, the calculating means 114b returns the number of repetitions and the divisor RWM (step S716). Then, the arithmetic unit 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions (step S717), and determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step S718). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S718), the process proceeds to step S709.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S718), the calculating unit 114b determines whether the value of the work area for ratio display is greater than 100 (step S719). When it is determined that the value of the work area for ratio display is not larger than 100 (NO in step S719), the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio calculation in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the work area for ratio display is greater than 100 (YES in step S719), the calculation means 114b determines that the ratio calculation has not been correctly performed because the ratio does not exceed 100, and the calculating means 114b determines that the ratio display work area has not been correctly calculated. The work area is cleared and the value is set to 0 (step S720), and the process returns to the calculation procedure of each ratio in FIG.

3.3.5.1.1 100 × Processing The 100 × processing (step S703) in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The calculation unit 114b acquires the RWM address of the initial value setting and calculation work area (step S731). Here, as the initial value setting, the number of bytes of the dividend obtained in step S673 in FIG. 41 is set as the number of repetitions. Specifically, when the number of times of the ratio calculation is 0, the number of bytes of the dividend “4” (the number of bytes “4” of the storage area for storing the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9) is set as the number of repetitions. . When the number of times of the ratio calculation is 1, the number of bytes of the dividend “3” (the number of bytes “3” of the storage area for storing the number of consecutive bonus payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of times of ratio calculation is 2, the number of bytes of the dividend “3” (the number of bytes “3” of the storage area for storing the number of paid-out bonuses of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of times of the ratio calculation is 3, the number of bytes of the dividend “4” (the number of bytes “4” of the storage area for storing the total number of consecutive bonus payouts in FIG. 9) is set as the number of repetitions. When the number of times of ratio calculation is 4, the number of bytes of the dividend “4” (the number of bytes “4” of the storage area for storing the total number of the paid-out bonuses in FIG. 9) is set as the number of repetitions.

  Subsequently, the calculating means 114b acquires the value of one byte of the dividend RWM address (step S732). Here, the value of the dividend RWM address is the value of the first byte of the dividend when executed for the first time, the value of the second byte of the dividend when executed for the second time, and so on. This is the value of the n-th byte when it is executed at the time of execution. However, the dividend RWM has a storage area (storage area corresponding to the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in FIG. 9) corresponding to the dividend information “number of advantageous section games” when the ratio calculation number is 0, and the ratio calculation number is “0”. In the case of 1, the storage area corresponding to the dividend information “the number of consecutive bonus payouts in the latest 6000 game” (the storage area corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus payouts of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), and if the number of times of ratio calculation is 2, The storage area corresponding to the dividend information “the number of bonus articles paid out in the latest 6000 games” (the storage area corresponding to the number of bonus articles paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), and the dividend information “cumulative game” when the number of times of ratio calculation is 3 Area (storage area corresponding to the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in FIG. 9), and when the number of times of calculation of the ratio is 4, the dividend information is "the number of bonuses to be paid in the cumulative game." The corresponding storage area (storage area corresponding to the character object payout number of total cumulative FIG. 9) to.

  Subsequently, the arithmetic means 114b multiplies the value of the one byte of the obtained dividend RWM address by 100, and stores the value of the upper byte in the H register and the value of the lower byte in the L register (step S733).

  Then, the operation unit 114b adds the value of the L register and the value of the D register, sets the addition result in the operation work area, and stores the value of the H register in the D register (step S734). However, when executed for the first time, it is stored in the first byte of the operation work area, and when it is executed for the second time, it is stored in the second byte of the operation work area. In this case, it is stored in the n-th byte of the calculation work area.

  The operation unit 114b determines whether a carry has occurred (whether a carry has occurred) in the operation result of adding the value of the L register and the value of the D register (step S735). When it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S735), the process proceeds to step S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is a carry-on (YES in step S735), the calculation unit 114b adds the carry-up value to the value of the D register to update the value of the D register (step S736). Then, the process proceeds to step S737.

  In step S737, the arithmetic unit 114b performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of repetitions. Then, the calculating means 114b determines whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (step S738). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S738), the process returns to step S732. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S738), the arithmetic unit 114b replaces the value of the D register corresponding to the most significant byte of the arithmetic result with the value of the dividend RWM address of 3 bytes. In this case, the fourth byte of the operation work area is set, and when the value of the dividend RWM address is 4 bytes, the fifth byte of the operation work area is set (step S739). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing in FIG.

3.3.5.1.2 Shift Process The shift process (steps S708 and S709) in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the shift processing in FIG. 42 is performed on the least significant bit of the A register corresponding to the least significant bit of the sixth byte and the fifth to first bytes of the arithmetic work area.

  The arithmetic means 114b initializes the most significant byte including the A register (step S751), and rotates the first to fifth bytes of the arithmetic work area one bit to the left (upper bit side) (step S752). Thus, the least significant bit of the A register, the fifth to second bytes of the operation work area, and the upper seven bits of the first byte of the operation work area have one byte from the fifth byte of the operation work area before rotation. The bits up to the eye will be stored. Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing in FIG.

3.3.3.5.1.3 Subtraction Processing The subtraction processing (step S711) in FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The operation means 114b subtracts the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the data of the 5th to 2nd bytes of the operation work area in the subtraction determination part (step S756). The value corresponding to the carry flag is subtracted from the least significant bit data of the A register in the determination part (step S757). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the ratio calculation processing in FIG. However, when the data from the 5th byte to the 2nd byte of the arithmetic work area is equal to or more than the data of the upper 2 bytes and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 0. On the other hand, when the data from the fifth byte to the second byte of the arithmetic work area is not equal to or greater than the data of the upper two bytes and the lower two bytes of the divisor, the value corresponding to the carry flag is 1.

3.3.6 Each Ratio Display Setting Each ratio display setting (step S556) in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether an E4 error has occurred (step S771). If it is determined that the E4 error has occurred (YES in step S771), the display control unit 115 sets all of the lightable locations to the first place, tens place, hundreds place, and thousands place of the ratio display. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) corresponding to lighting is set (step S772). The set values for the first place, tens place, hundreds place, and thousands place of the ratio display are set to the first place, tens place of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. , Hundreds, thousands places, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP are used to turn on or off.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the error is the E4 error (NO in step S771), the display control unit 115 performs a ratio display data acquisition process which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 47 (step S773).

  Subsequent to step S773, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio display number is 1 corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) or 2 corresponding to the bonus ratio (6000 games) (step S773). S774). If it is determined that the ratio display number is 1 or 2 (YES in step S774), the process proceeds to step S775, and if it is determined that the ratio display number is neither 1 nor 2 (NO in step S774), the process proceeds to step S775. Proceed to S776.

  In step S775, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (whether or not the number of games since installation or after clearing the RWM has not reached 6000) (step S775). If it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is not 0 (NO in step S775), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (YES in step S775), the process proceeds to step S777.

  In step S776, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games is greater than 174999. If it is determined that the total number of games is greater than 174999 (YES in step S776), the process proceeds to step S779, and if it is determined that the total number of games is equal to or less than 174999 (NO in step S776). ), And the process proceeds to step S777. In addition, 174999 of the total number of games is an example, and is not limited to this.

  In step S777, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio blinking flag is 0. When it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S777), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S777), the display control unit 115 clears the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 and sets the value to 0 (step S778). Then, the process proceeds to step S779.

  When the ratio display number is 1 or 2, when the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after the installation or after the RWM clear reaches 6000, when the ratio blinking flag is 0, the ratio display in step S802 in FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 30, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places are illuminated at the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69, A, B, C, D, E, It is used to turn on / off F, G, and DP. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set value for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display in step S778 is changed to the hundreds place of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. , Are used to turn on or off the thousands of lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP, and the lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, All DPs are turned off.

  When the ratio display number is 0, 3, or 4, the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after the installation or after the RWM clear reaches 175000, and the ratio display in step S802 in FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 30, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the display are set to the hundreds and thousands places of possible lighting A, B, C, D, and D on the ratio display 69. It is used to turn on, off, E, F, G, DP. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set value for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display in step S778 is changed to the hundreds place of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 of FIG. , Are used to turn on or off the thousands of lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP, and the lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, All DPs are turned off.

  In step S779, the display control unit 115 acquires data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio comparison data table. Here, the ratio comparison data table includes the ratio display number, the type of the ratio, and the specified value of the ratio (a value for determining that an illegal operation has been performed. Is determined to be present). The type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” and the prescribed value of the ratio “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 0, and the ratio type “continuous character ratio (6000) is associated with the ratio display number 1. Game) "and a specified ratio value" 70 "are stored, and a ratio type" accessory ratio (6000 games) "and a specified ratio value" 70 "are stored in association with the ratio display number 2. . In addition, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)” and the specified ratio value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 3, and the ratio type “accessory ratio” is associated with the ratio display number 4. (Total) "and a specified ratio value" 70 "are stored. Note that the prescribed value 70 of the ratio is an example, and is not limited to this. It is not necessary that the value be the same between the ratios.

  Subsequent to step S779, the display control unit 115 compares the data (the specified value of the ratio) corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S779 with the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number (step S780). . Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number is the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio of FIG. 9). If the ratio display number is 1, it is the value of the continuous character ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), and if the ratio display number is 2, It is the value of the accessory ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9), and when the ratio display number is 3, the value of the continuous accessory ratio (total) (FIG. 9) , The value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous total ratio of the total), and in the case where the ratio display number is 4, the value of the storage ratio (cumulative) corresponding to the total (the storage area corresponding to the total total of the ratio of the bonus in FIG. 9) Value).

  Subsequent to step S780, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the determination result is a carry-on (step S781). When it is determined that the determination result is a carry (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is less than the obtained data (the specified value of the ratio)) (YES in step S781), the processing of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. 33 is performed. Return to the procedure.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not a carry (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or more than the acquired data (the specified value of the ratio)) (NO in step S781), the display control unit 115 sets the ratio blinking flag to It is determined whether it is 0 (step S782). Then, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S782), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S782), the display control unit 115 clears the tens and ones digits of the ratio display 69 and sets the value to 0 (step S783). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG.

  When the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or greater than the specified ratio, and when the ratio blinking flag is 0, the set values for the first place and the tens place of the ratio display in step S811 of FIG. In the 7-segment display process of step S447, the first and the tenth lit places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the ratio display 69 are used to turn on or off. . When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the first and tens digits of the ratio display in step S783 are changed to the first position of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. , Which are used to turn on or off the tens place of possible lighting A, B, C, D, E, F, G, DP, and the possible lighting places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, All DPs are turned off.

  The acquisition of the ratio display data of FIG. 46 (step S773) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires display data and display determination data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio display data table (step S801). The ratio display data table stores ratio display numbers, ratio types, display data, and display determination data in association with each other. Corresponding to the ratio display number “0”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)”, the display data “$ 27F7” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 11110111”, the thousands place can be turned on A , B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds places are lit locations A, B, C, E, F, G, and DP), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “1”, the ratio type “continuous character ratio (6000 games)”, display data “$ 7DFC” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 01111101 11111100, thousands can be lit Locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and hundreds places are lit, and locations C, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “2”, the type of ratio is “accessory ratio (6000 games)”, the display data is “$ 27FC” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 11111100”, and the thousands place can be turned on. A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places C, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit, and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “3”, the type of ratio “continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)”, display data “$ 7DD8” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11011000 in binary notation, thousands places can be turned on A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and lit places D, E, G, and DP are lit, and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “4”, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)”, display data “$ 27D8” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 11011000”, the thousands place can be turned on A, B, C, and F are lit, and hundreds places are illuminated. Lightable locations D, E, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. However, of the four digits in hexadecimal notation of the display data, the upper two digits correspond to the thousands place of the ratio display 69, and the lower two digits correspond to the hundreds place of the ratio display 69. I do. The display determination data is set by the function of the slot machine, and the display determination data “1” uses the value calculated in the ratio calculation process to display the tens place and the ones place on the ratio display 69. For example, in a slot machine that does not have a function related to an advantageous section, the display determination data stored in association with the ratio display number “0” is “0”.

  The display control means 115 sets the display data acquired in step S801 to the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display (step S802). For example, when the ratio display number is 0, $ F7 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the hundreds digit of the ratio indicator, and $ 27 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the thousands digit.

  Then, the display control unit 115 sets $ 4040 (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S803). This process is a process for setting the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the ratio display number for which the display determination data is 0 to “−−” (only the lightable portion G is lit). is there. Then, by performing the processing of step S803 before step S804 described later, the processing of step S803 is performed even in the slot machine in which the display determination data for all the ratio display numbers is 1. Step S803 is the same as that of the first embodiment in which the program for displaying “−−” used in the case of a model that does not have the function related to the advantageous section has the function related to the advantageous section. This is a step for avoiding a so-called “unused program” that will not be executed.

  Then, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the display determination data acquired in step S801 is 0 (step S804). When it is determined that the display determination data is 0 (YES in step S804), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display, and here, the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place. $ 40 (hexadecimal notation) is set to the tens place and the tens place (step S811). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display determination data is not 0 (NO in step S804), the display control unit 115 acquires the value of the ratio RWM address corresponding to the ratio display number (step S805). Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 9) is obtained. The value of the accessory ratio (6000 games) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 9) is obtained, and if the ratio display number is 2, the value of the accessory ratio (6000 games) ( When the ratio display number is 3, the value of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) is obtained (the total cumulative continuous character ratio in FIG. 9 is obtained). When the ratio display number is 4, the value of the accessory ratio (total) (the value of the storage region corresponding to the total accessory ratio in FIG. 9) is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S805, the display control unit 115 sets $ 6F6F (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S806). In this process, when the value of the ratio RWM is 100, the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 is set to “99” (lightable places other than the lightable places E and DP are lit). It is processing for.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether or not the value of the ratio RWM address is 100 (step S807). When the value of the ratio RWM is determined to be 100 (YES in step S807), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display, and here, the display data of the ratio display is set. $ 6F (hexadecimal notation) is set for each of the first and tens places (step S811). Then, the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG.

  When it is determined that the value of the RWM of the ratio indicator is not 100 (NO in step S807), the display control unit 115 calculates the quotient and the remainder by dividing the value of the ratio RWM address by 10 (decimal notation) ( Step S808). The value of the quotient in decimal notation is the value of the ratio RWM address in the decimal notation, and the value of the remainder in decimal notation is one of the value of the ratio RWM address in decimal notation. The value of the place.

  Then, the display control unit 115 performs display data acquisition processing, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 48 for acquiring the tens display data (step S809), and subsequently acquires the ones display data. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 48 (step S810). Then, the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first and tens places of the ratio display (step S811), and returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG.

  The display data acquisition process (steps S809 and S810) of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculation data in step S808 of FIG. 47 (step S831). Here, in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the tens place display data, the lower four bits of the quotient value are acquired, and in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the first place display data, , The bit value of the lower 4 bits of the remainder value is obtained. Since the value of the ratio RWM address is 0 or more and less than 100, the value of the quotient and the value of the remainder are 0 or more and 9 or less in decimal notation, and can be represented by 4 bits in binary notation. For this reason, the lower four bits of the calculation data are obtained.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets the 8-bit bit value corresponding to the value of the lower 4 bits acquired in step S831 to the display data (step S832), and proceeds to the processing procedure of the ratio display data acquisition processing in FIG. Return.

  However, when the lower 4 bits are 0000 (binary notation), the display data includes hexadecimal notation $ 3F (in binary notation, 00111111, lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, and F light up). Is set, and if the lower 4 bits are 0001 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 06 in hexadecimal notation (000001100 in binary notation, and the lit locations B and C are lit). If the bit is 0010 (binary notation), $ 5B in hexadecimal notation (01011011 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, D, E, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. If the bit is 0011 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 4F in hexadecimal notation (01001111 in binary notation, lightable locations A, B, C, D, and G are lit), and the lower four bits are set. Bit Is 0100 (binary notation), $ 66 in hexadecimal notation (01100110 in binary notation, lightable locations B, C, F, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are 0101. In the case of (binary notation), $ 6D in hexadecimal notation (01101101 in binary notation, lightable locations A, C, D, F, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are 0110. In the case of (binary notation), $ 7D in hexadecimal notation (01111101 in binary notation, lightable locations A, C, D, E, F, and G light up) are set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits Is 0111 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 27 in hexadecimal notation (00100111 in binary notation, the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit), and the lower 4 bits are 1000 ( In hexadecimal notation), the display data is set to $ 7F in hexadecimal notation (in binary notation, 01111111, lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, and G are lit), and the lower 4 bits Is 1001 (binary notation), $ 6F in hexadecimal notation (01101111 in binary notation, lightable locations A, B, C, D, F, and G light up) are set in the display data.

4. Sub error notification processing The error notification processing in the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the sub-control command receiving unit 201 of the sub-CPU 71 has received the transmission command in step S439 of FIG. 30 from the sub-control command transmitting unit 111 of the main CPU 61 (step S851). If it is determined that the transmission command has not been received (NO in step S851), the process ends.

  When it is determined that the transmission command has been received (YES in step S851), it is determined whether the transmission command is in the door state (step S852). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the transmission command is in a door state related to opening and closing of the door (front door 5).

  If it is determined that the transmission command is in the door state (YES in step S852), it is determined whether the door state is the open state of the front door 5 (step S853). When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S853), an error notification is performed (step S854). Specifically, sound is output from the speaker, an image is output from the liquid crystal display 27, and the effect lamp is turned on and blinks. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the front door 5 is not in the open state, that is, in the closed state (NO in step S853), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S855). Specifically, the sound output from the speaker is stopped, the image output of the liquid crystal display 27 is stopped, and the lighting and blinking of the effect lamp are stopped. Then, the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S852 that the transmission command is not in the door state (NO in step S852), an error notification is performed (step S856). Specifically, a voice notification of "error" is issued from the speaker, and an error code such as "E2" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, for example.

  Subsequent to step S856, it is determined whether or not information indicating that an error state has occurred in step S132 of FIG. 20 has been received (step S857). When it is determined that the information indicating that it is in the error state has not been received (NO in step S857), the apparatus enters a standby state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information indicating the error state has been received (YES in step S857), error re-notification is performed (step S858).

  Subsequent to step S858, it is determined whether an error release event (signal) has been received (step S859). If it is determined that an error release event (signal) has been received (YES in step S859), the error notification is cleared (initialized) (step S860). That is, the state returns to a state where error notification is not performed. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error release event (signal) has not been received (NO in step S859), the process ends.

  Next, the relationship between the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

  It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in a state in which the game can proceed, and no error has occurred. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 in accordance with the progress of the game, and a display corresponding to the progress of the game such as a display of the number of payout medals is performed.

  When displaying the game history information, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 uses the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode (first lighting mode) described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. Control is performed. As a result, the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the ratio display (position ratio monitor) 69 for 5 seconds as described in the control contents of the position ratio monitor in FIG. , Display item (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (3) bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and display item (4) continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) Is displayed. At this time, a normal display mode (first lighting mode) that is specifically displayed on the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. However, the normal display mode (first lighting mode) is a part (in the present embodiment, the thousands place, the tens place, the ones place) of the plurality of lightable places of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69. In this case, other lightable portions except for the lightable portion DP) are used.

  Then, when the power is turned off while the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed, the main CPU 61 is in a power-off state, and the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 and the payout display 46 are turned off. I do.

  Thereafter, when the power is turned on and the specific event detecting means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an RWM error (corresponding to a predetermined specific event of the specific events), the main CPU 61 enters an E4 error state, and the game stopping means 113 The game is stopped so that the game cannot progress. At this time, under the control of the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61, the payout display 46 displays the error code E4. At this time, the contents concretely displayed on the payout display 46 are shown in the 7-segment display.

  Further, when the RWM error is detected, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 controls the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 in the special display mode (second lighting mode) described with reference to FIG. Perform special control. At this time, a special display mode (second lighting mode) that is specifically displayed on the ratio indicator (composition ratio monitor) is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. However, the special display mode (second lighting mode) is a part of the plurality of lightable locations of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 that is not used in the normal display mode (first lighting mode). In the embodiment, at least the thousands of places, the tens place, and the ones place where lighting is possible DP) are used at least, and in this embodiment, a plurality of lighting possible places of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 are used. is there. As described above, when the RWM error occurs, the ratio display (the role ratio monitor) is specially controlled to the special display mode (the second lighting mode), so that the front door 5 is opened and the inside of the housing 3 is checked. In this case, it is possible to know that an RWM error has occurred without having to check the error code displayed on the payout indicator 46 on the front side of the front door 5 one by one. That is, it is possible to know the occurrence of the RWM error while opening the front door 5 and checking the inside of the housing, and it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of having to look at the payout display 46.

  Then, when the power is turned off, the main CPU 61 is turned off, and the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 and the payout display 46 are turned off.

  A setting change state shift operation is performed to cancel the RWM error, and the main CPU 61 shifts to a setting change state. At this timing, the RWM error is canceled, and the stop of the game by the game stop means 113 is canceled. Then, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 in accordance with the progress of the game, and a display corresponding to the progress of the game such as a display of the number of payout medals is performed. The display of the payout display 46 in the setting change state can be variously determined, and all the 7-segment of the payout display 46 may be turned on so that the setting change state can be recognized.

  Further, when the display control unit 115 of the main CPU 61 shifts to the setting change state, the display control unit 115 does not perform the above-described special control, and performs the normal display mode (first lighting mode) described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. Normal control for controlling the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is performed. As a result, the display of the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is started on the ratio display (position ratio monitor) 69 as described in the control contents of the position ratio monitor in FIG. (1) The advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, subsequently, the display item (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (3) the character ratio (6000 games) is displayed. It is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (4) continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, a normal display mode (first lighting mode) that is specifically displayed on the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor. However, since the RWM has been cleared, the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 are blinked, and the lower two digits (ratio of the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69). 00 is displayed in the tens place and the ones place).

  Then, when the setting is determined in the setting changeable state, the main CPU 61 enters the game progressable state.

  The transition of the setting change state and the determination of the setting will be described. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts the setting change key into the key cylinder with the power switch 50a turned off, rotates the key, and turns on the setting change key switch (corresponding to "special operation means") 50b. Perform the operation you want. The power switch is turned on in this state. At this time, the main CPU 61 (special operation detecting means (not shown) provided in the main CPU 61) detects an operation of turning on the setting change key switch 50b, and shifts to a setting change state. The setting change state means that the setting control means (corresponding to “setting means”) 101 is stepwise based on the operation of the setting change button (corresponding to “setting operation means”) 50c according to the degree of advantage of the player. Is set in any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 6 in the present embodiment) provided in.

  Then, the setting control unit 101 cyclically switches the set value of the winning probability from the setting 1 to the setting 6 every time the administrator operates the setting change button 50c. The administrator operates the start switch 19 when the set value of the winning probability becomes a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, and the setting control means 101 detects the operation on the start switch 19 and sets the set value. Confirm. Then, the administrator turns the setting change key switch 50b by rotating the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder, and the setting control means 101 detects the turning off of the setting change key switch 50b and executes the setting change processing. finish.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the timing of returning to the normal control of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 after the detection of the RWM error is the timing of shifting to the setting change state after the occurrence of the RWM error, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the timing of re-input of the setting after the transition to the setting change state, the timing of detecting the setting confirmation operation after the transition to the setting change state, the timing of canceling the RWM error, the timing of ending the setting change state, and the like may be used.

  Next, other relationships between the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the operation is the same as in FIG. 58 until the power is first turned off and then the power is turned on, the description is omitted here.

  When the power is turned on and the specific event detecting means 112 of the main CPU 61 detects an error other than the RWM error (a specific event different from a predetermined specific event among the specific events, here an E0 error), the main CPU 61 issues an E0 error. The game is stopped, and the game stop means 113 stops the game so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display 46 displays the error code E0 under the control of the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61. At this time, the contents concretely displayed on the payout display 46 are shown in the 7-segment display.

  In addition, in the case of an error other than the RWM error (here, the E0 error), the data for displaying the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) and the like are not broken. In addition, the normal control for controlling the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 is performed in the normal display mode (first lighting mode) described with reference to FIG. As a result, the display of the display item (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is started on the ratio display (position ratio monitor) 69 as described in the control contents of the position ratio monitor in FIG. (1) The advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed for 5 seconds, subsequently, the display item (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and the display item (3) the character ratio (6000 games) is displayed. Displayed for 5 seconds, display item (4) continuous agent ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (5) agent ratio (total) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total) ) Is displayed for 5 seconds. At this time, a normal display mode (first lighting mode) that is specifically displayed on the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor.

  After that, when the error is released, the main CPU 61 enters a game proceedable state. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 in accordance with the progress of the game, the display of the error code E0 disappears, and the display corresponding to the progress of the game such as the display of the number of paid out medals is performed. Will be It should be noted that the method of canceling an error other than the RWM error (E0 error in this case) does not require setting change, and can be canceled by operating a reset switch, a setting change button in the present embodiment.

  Next, a modified example of the relationship between the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69, the display of the payout display 46, and the state of the main CPU 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

  It is assumed that the main CPU 61 is in a state in which the game can proceed, and no error has occurred. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 in accordance with the progress of the game, and a display corresponding to the progress of the game such as a display of the number of payout medals is performed.

  When displaying the game history information, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 uses the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode (first lighting mode) described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. Control is performed. As a result, the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the ratio display device (composition ratio monitor) 69 for 5 seconds, as described in the control contents of the combination ratio monitor in FIG. , Display item (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, display item (3) bonus ratio (6000 games) is displayed for 5 seconds, and display item (4) continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) Is displayed. At this time, a normal display mode (first lighting mode) that is specifically displayed on the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is illustrated in the 7-segment display of the combination ratio monitor.

  Then, it is assumed that an error (here, E0 error) other than the RWM error has occurred during the display of the display item (4) the ratio of the consecutive characters (total). The main CPU 61 enters an E0 error state, and the game stopping means 113 stops the game so that the game cannot proceed. At this time, the payout display 46 displays the error code E0 under the control of the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61. At this time, the contents concretely displayed on the payout display 46 are shown in the 7-segment display.

  When an error other than the RWM error (E0 error in this case) occurs and the display item is switched for the first time after the occurrence of the error is detected, the display control unit 115 of the main CPU 61 sets a special display mode (second lighting mode). The special control for controlling the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 is performed, and this special control is continuously performed until the display item is switched for the first time after the error is released. In the special display mode (second lighting mode) in this case, abbreviations for identifying display items are displayed at the thousands place and the hundreds place on the ratio display, and the thousands and hundreds places are displayed. Each dot portion (lightable portion DP) lights up, and the ratio of display items is displayed in the tens place and the ones place, and each dot portion in the tens place and the ones place (the lightable place DP) ) Lights up. As a result, the display item (4) displayed on the ratio indicator (composition ratio monitor) 69 at the time of occurrence of the error (4) the continuous combination ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the normal display mode (first lighting mode) for a total of 5 seconds. And the display item (5) is displayed for 5 seconds in the special display mode (second lighting mode), and then the display item (1) the advantageous section ratio (total) ) Is displayed for 5 seconds in the special display mode (second lighting mode), and the display item (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games) is displayed in the special display mode (second lighting mode).

  After that, when the error is released, the main CPU 61 enters a game proceedable state. At this time, the payout display 46 is controlled by the payout display control means 118 of the main CPU 61 in accordance with the progress of the game, the display of the error code E0 disappears, and the display corresponding to the progress of the game such as the display of the number of paid out medals is performed. Will be

  When the display item is switched for the first time after the error is cleared, the display control means 115 of the main CPU 61 performs the normal control for controlling the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 in the normal display mode (first lighting mode). . As a result, the display item (2) continuous bonus item ratio (6000 games) displayed on the ratio display (position ratio monitor) 69 at the time of error cancellation is kept in the special display mode (second lighting mode) for a total of 5 seconds. The display item (3) is displayed continuously for 5 seconds in the normal display mode (first lighting mode) until the display item (3) is displayed. ) Is displayed for 5 seconds in the normal display mode (first lighting mode).

  In this way, when a certain error occurs, the ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 is specially controlled to be in a special display mode (second lighting mode), so that the front door is opened and the inside of the housing is checked. In this case, it is possible to know that an error has occurred without checking the error code displayed on the payout display 46 on the front side of the front door. In other words, it is possible to know the occurrence of some error while opening the front door and checking the inside of the housing, and it is possible to reduce the inconvenience of having to look at the payout display. In this modification, since the display control of the display items displayed on the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 is maintained, even if an error occurs, the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 is used. It is possible to know the occurrence of an error while confirming the display contents of the display items of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a modified example of the display content of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs, and the display content of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 regardless of the type of error. explain. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 61 corresponds to the second lighting mode (special display mode), and the display control corresponds to special control.

  Modifications 1 to 4 relate to the display of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 when an RWM error occurs. The display contents in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 6 is a specific display example of a display 69.

  In the first modification, in the thousands place, the hundreds place, the tens place, and the ones place of the ratio display 69, among the lightable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, Only the lit locations G and DP are turned on ("-" display + dot lighting).

  In the second modification, in each of the thousands, hundreds, tens, and ones places of the ratio display 69, among the lightable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, Only the lit locations A, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit ("E" display + dot lit).

  In the third modification, in the thousands place, the hundreds place, the tens place, and the ones place of the ratio display 69, among the lightable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, Only the lit locations DP are lit (no display + dot lit).

  In the fourth modification, in the thousands and hundreds places of the ratio display 69, the identification display of the lightable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP (corresponding to the display items in FIG. 11). Illuminated point and the illuminated point DP corresponding to the abbreviated abbreviation are illuminated, and the illuminated points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP can be illuminated in the tens and ones places. Only the points A, D, E, F, G, and DP are turned on (identification display + “E” display + dot lighting). In the tens place and the tens place, only the lit locations G and DP of the lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G and DP may be lit (identification display). + "-" Display + dot lighting).

  Modification 5 relates to the display of a ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 when an error occurs regardless of the type of error. The display content in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 6 is a specific display example of a display 69.

  In the fifth modification, in the thousands and hundreds places of the ratio display 69, the identification display of the lightable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP (corresponding to the display items in FIG. 11). Illuminated point and the illuminated point DP corresponding to the abbreviated abbreviation are illuminated, and in the tens place and the ones place, the ratio among the illuminable places A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP is determined. The corresponding lightable location and the lightable location DP are lit (identification display + ratio display + dot lighting). The fifth modification is used when an error occurs in FIG.

  A comparison between the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 61 and the display contents of the 7-segment display column of FIG. 11 or 12 shows that RWM errors and modifications of Modifications 1 to 4 in FIG. In the special control at the time of occurrence of the error 5, all the lit places DP of the thousands display, the tens place and the ones place of the ratio display 69 which are not turned on by the normal control of FIG. 11 or 12 are turned on. It has become so. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an RWM error has occurred in Modifications 1 to 4 or that an error has occurred in Modification 5 according to the display of the ratio indicator 69. become.

  Note that the first lighting mode (normal lighting mode) displayed by the normal control and the second lighting mode (special lighting mode) displayed by the special control are not limited to those described above. The first lighting mode uses a lightable portion other than a part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69, and the second lighting mode uses a lightable portion of the ratio display 69 among the lightable portions. It is only necessary to use at least some of the lit portions.

  According to the first embodiment, when the dividend B is equal to or smaller than the divisor A, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A (the dividend B is multiplied by 100 and the result of multiplying by 100 (B × 100) is divided by the divisor A. Quotient is always 100 (decimal notation) or less, and it is noted that the quotient can be represented by 7 bits, and only the lower 7 bits are calculated as the quotient value. Therefore, the calculation load of the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A is reduced, and the calculation can be performed in a short time.

  When the dividend B is equal to or less than the divisor A, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A can be calculated as follows. The dividend B is multiplied by 100 and the divisor A is subtracted from the result (B × 100) obtained by multiplying the dividend by 100, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (B × 100−A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage is 0% or more and less than 1%. If it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100−A), and it is determined whether the subtraction result (B × 100−2 × A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage is 1% or more and less than 2%. If it is 0 or more, the divisor A is subtracted from the subtraction result (B × 100−2 × A), and it is determined whether the subtraction result (B × 100−3 × A) is less than 0. If it is less than 0, the percentage is 2% or more and less than 3%. By repeating this, the ratio (percentage) of the dividend B to the divisor A can be calculated. In this method, the subtraction process and the determination process need only be performed up to 100 times, and the calculation load can be reduced to some extent. On the other hand, the method of calculating the percentage according to the first embodiment calculates only the lower 7 bits as the quotient value, so that the calculation load can be further reduced.

  According to the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of FIG. 61, the inspector can easily inspect or confirm the inspection items such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) and generate an RWM error during the inspection. In this case, the display for notifying the RWM error is displayed on the ratio display 69 for displaying the inspection items such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total), so that the inspector can recognize the occurrence of the RWM error at an early stage. According to FIG. 60 and Modification Example 5, the inspection item such as the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) can be easily inspected or confirmed by the inspector, and when an error occurs during the inspection, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) etc. Is displayed on the ratio display 69 that displays the inspection item of the above, so that the inspector can recognize the occurrence of the error at an early stage.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the counting by the counting means 114a is performed after the determination by the symbol determination means (winning determination means) 109 and before the payout processing by the payout control means 110. Even if a power interruption occurs during the medal payout process and the power is then restored when initialization is performed, for example, even if a setting change occurs unexpectedly during the medal payout, the tallying is performed. Processing has already been performed. Therefore, even if a power interruption occurs during the medal payout process and the power is then restored when the power is restored, for example, a sudden change in the setting during the medal payout may occur. Also, the number of medals paid out can be accurately counted.

  According to the first embodiment, since the ratio is displayed on the ratio seg of the ratio display 69, the inspector can easily determine whether or not fraud is performed based on the value displayed on the ratio seg. it can. Further, according to the first embodiment, the identification segment of the ratio display 69 is a number in which the total number of games is a predetermined number (6000 for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) and the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the advantageous section ratio (Cumulative), the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and the accessory ratio (cumulative) become 175000), and are lit up after reaching. Therefore, the examiner can easily recognize whether the display content of the ratio display 69 is before the predetermined number or after the predetermined number is reached. Further, the ratio segment of the ratio display 69 includes the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative). When the calculated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio prescribed value (a value for judging that fraud has been performed, and if the calculated value is equal to or greater than the ratio specified value, it is determined that fraud has been performed) Blinks, and lights up when the ratio is less than the specified value. Therefore, the inspector can easily recognize whether or not the display content of the ratio display 69 is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio specified value, that is, whether or not fraud is performed. Further, the examiner can easily recognize whether or not fraud is performed by blinking and lighting the ratio seg without knowing the specified value of the ratio.

  According to the first embodiment, information that is totaled when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, every 400 games) and information that is totaled even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game) , The waste of the tallying process can be eliminated. Further, according to the first embodiment, the calculation items calculated when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in this embodiment) and the calculation items are calculated even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (every game in this embodiment). By separating the calculation items from the calculation items, waste of the calculation process can be reduced, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the ratio display 69 displays the display items (1) to (5) in a predetermined order. In a specific order (in this embodiment, the order opposite to the predetermined order), a plurality of calculation items (in this embodiment, the effective section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games) ), The continuous bonus ratio (total), and the bonus ratio (total)), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game) corresponds to the first order in the predetermined order. Calculation item (book The facilities embodiment, by calculating only the effective section ratio Total), it is possible to perform operation efficiently.

  According to the first embodiment, when the state shifts to the setting change state after the detection of the RWM error, the stop of the game is released and the display of the ratio display 69 is controlled in the first lighting mode. In addition, since the display of the ratio indicator 69 is controlled in the first lighting mode, the examiner can quickly recognize that the stop of the game has been released. According to FIG. 60, when the error is released after the detection of the error, the stop of the game is released, and the display of the ratio display 69 is controlled in the first lighting mode. Since the ratio display 69 is controlled to be displayed in the first lighting mode, the player can quickly recognize that the stop of the game has been released.

  Subsequently, an arrangement relationship of components (a connector, a ratio display, a main CPU, an IC, and the like) mounted on the main control board 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, three connectors CN1, CN2, and CN3 are mounted in an area near one edge thereof, and an edge near the connector CN3 in an area near an edge facing the one edge. One connector CN4 is mounted nearby. Of the connectors CN1, CN2, CN3, and CN4, at least the connector CN1 is formed in the board case CS as shown in FIG. 29A showing a schematic cross-sectional view of the main control board 63 in FIG. The connector is exposed to the outside through the connector opening CS1.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, a main CPU 61 is mounted near an edge on the connector CN1 side in an area near the above-mentioned opposing edge. A test mounting area for mounting a test IC or the like is provided between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN4.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, a ratio display 69 and ICs 81 and 82 are mounted between the main CPU 61 and the connector CN1. The ratio display 69 is arranged at a position closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61. The ICs 81 and 82 are disposed between the ratio display 69 and the main CPU 61, and as shown in FIG. 62 (a), are described as ratio display (in FIG. ) 69, the height from the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 is lower (see the dotted line in FIG. 62A). However, no component such as an IC having a lower height than the ratio display 69 is arranged between the ratio display 69 and the connector CN1. Preferably, the ratio display 69 is arranged between the connector closest to the main CPU 61 and the main CPU 61. The ratio indicator 69 is arranged between the connector corresponding to the connector opening having the longest opening side and the main CPU 61 because the longer the opening side is, the easier it is to insert an unauthorized member such as a wire. Is preferred.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the ratio display 69 has a surface opposite to one surface (component mounting surface) 63A of the main control substrate 63 (the back surface of the main control substrate 63 on which no components are mounted). Soldering 69A is performed only on the 63B side, and the connector CN1, the main CPU (simply referred to as “CPU” in FIG. 62) 61, the ICs 81 and 82, etc. Soldering CN1A, 61A, 81A, 82A is performed on both sides of the opposite surface 63B. Note that components other than the ratio indicator 69 are not soldered on both surfaces of the one surface 63A and the opposite surface 63B. For example, the connector CN1 is soldered on only one surface such as only the opposite surface 63B side. Is also good.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, ICs 83, 84, 85, diodes 91, resistor groups 92, 94, transistors 93, and capacitor groups 95 are mounted.

  The ICs 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, the diode 91, the resistor groups 92, 94, the transistor 93, and the capacitor group 95 serve, for example, to input signals to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to external devices. Parts related to

  As shown in FIG. 5, from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, the connector CN1, the ratio indicator 69, the ICs 81 and 82, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in order, and the ratio indicator 69 is arranged closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61. The resulting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (b), (c), and (d).

  FIG. 62B is an example different from the embodiment, in which a connector CN1, an IC 81, and a main CPU 61 are arranged in this order. In this case, in order to allow the illegal member 180 such as a wire inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the IC 81. Since it is easy to get over the unauthorized member 180, even if there is an IC 81 having a low height between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61, it is not difficult to make the unauthorized member 180 reach the main CPU 61.

  FIG. 62C is an example different from the embodiment, in which the connector CN1, the IC 81, the ratio display 69, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side. In this case, in order to allow the unauthorized member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to get over the IC 81 and the ratio display 69, but a component having a higher height than a component having a lower height is required. Although it is difficult to get over the fraudulent member 180, by using the low-height IC 81 arranged between the connector CN1 and the ratio display 69, the fraudulent member 180 can be moved to the high-ratio display 69. Therefore, even if the IC 81 and the ratio display 69 are provided between the connector CN1 and the main CPU 61, it is not difficult to cause the unauthorized member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  FIG. 62D shows an embodiment in which the connector CN1, the ratio display 69, the ICs 81 and 82, and the main CPU 61 are arranged in this order from the connector CN1 side to the main CPU 61 side, and the ratio display 69 is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the connector CN1. (For example, a distance within twice the height of the ratio display 69). In this case, in order to allow the unauthorized member 180 inserted from the connector opening CS1 to reach the main CPU 61, it is necessary to move over the ratio indicator 69 and the IC 81, and the ratio indicator having a higher height than a component having a lower height is required. It is difficult for the fraudulent member 180 to get over the device 69, and since no low-height component is mounted between the connector CN1 and the high-ratio indicator 69, the fraudulent member 180 is raised. It is not possible to use low-height components to get over the ratio indicator 69. Further, by disposing the ratio display 69 at a position closer to the connector CN1 than the main CPU 61, the space available for the unauthorized member 180 inserted through the connector opening CS1 to get over the ratio display 69 is also reduced, and thus the unauthorized member is reduced. It is difficult for 180 to get over the ratio display 69, and it is difficult for the unauthorized member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  In order to prevent the unauthorized member 180 from using an IC or the like having a lower height than the ratio display 69 to get over the ratio display 69, the ratio display 69 is connected to the main CPU 61 from the connector CN1. It is also possible to dispose it at a close position and dispose parts such as an IC having a lower height than the ratio display 69 between the ratio display 69 and the main CPU 61 without disposing them between the connector CN1 and the ratio display 69. However, it is difficult for the unauthorized member 180 to reach the main CPU 61.

  According to the arrangement relationship of the connector CN1, the main CPU 61, the ratio indicator 69, and the ICs 81 and 82 described with reference to FIG. By accommodating 69, fraudulent acts on the ratio display 69 can be made difficult, and even if the fraudulent member 180 is inserted from the connector opening CS1 to attempt fraudulent acts on the main CPU 61, the ratio display 69 is not displayed. As a barrier, it becomes difficult for the unauthorized member 180 to reach the main CPU 61, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act on the main CPU 61. Further, by mounting the ratio display 69 near the connector CN1, it is possible to collectively check the display content of the ratio display 69 and the periphery of the connector that is likely to be subject to fraud.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 62A, by soldering the ratio indicator 69 only on the opposite surface 63B side of the main control board 63, the surface of the ratio indicator 69 facing the main control board 63 is formed. (The lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 on the side opposite to the display surface on which the 7-segment display of the ratio indicator 69 is disposed) is separated from the soldered portion by a predetermined amount. It is possible to make the space between the direction 63A and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 narrower, and the main CPU 61 through the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. It becomes difficult to commit wrongdoing.

  Although the ratio display 69 is configured by four separate 7-segment displays, the ratio display 69 may be configured to include at least one display unit configured by unitizing a plurality of 7-segment displays. Good. For example, the display unit may be configured by one display unit configured by unitizing four 7-segment displays, or configured by two display units configured by unitizing two 7-segment displays. In this case, the gap between the seven-segment displays in the ratio indicator 69 is eliminated or the number of the gaps is reduced, so that it is difficult for the main CPU 61 to perform an illegal act by passing the unauthorized member 180 through the gap between the seven-segment displays. .

  The ratio display 69 has a rectangular shape, and the terminals of the ratio display 69 are provided on the side 69B1 of the ratio display 69 facing the connector CN1 and on the side 69B2 of the ratio display 69 facing the side 69B1. The ratio indicator 69 may be mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be arranged. In this case, the unauthorized member 180 is passed through the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface of the ratio indicator 69 facing the main control board 63 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69), and is then passed to the main CPU 61. Even if an illegal act is attempted, the terminal of the ratio indicator 69 acts as a barrier, making it difficult to pass the illegal member 180 through the gap. can do.

  The main board area 63 is provided with a test mounting area for mounting an electronic component at the time of testing in order to output a test signal, and the ratio indicator 69 is mounted in an area close to the test mounting area. You may. The test mounting area is an area in which electronic components are mounted for transmitting and receiving signals to and from a test device. Do not tie directly. Therefore, when a fraudulent person performs a fraudulent act, it is necessary to allow a fraudulent member such as a wire to reach another electronic component beyond the mounting area at the time of the test. This makes it easy to visually recognize the illegal member, so that illegal acts on the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Further, the arrangement of components (connector, ratio display, main CPU, IC, etc.) mounted on the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Incidentally, the signals transmitted on the main control board 63 include, for example, set values (setting 1 to setting 6) for easily acquiring medals, game states (normal game state, special game state, etc.), winning and winning, medals, and the like. And signals that are not directly related to either the game advantage or the acquisition of the game medium, such as the driving of the hopper motor 57 for the payout of the game, and the signal that is not directly related to the game advantage or the acquisition of the game medium. It is. In FIG. 63, a region surrounded by a dotted line includes, as terminals, a first terminal that handles a signal directly related to one of the game advantage and the acquisition of the game medium. In some cases, the second terminal for handling a signal not directly related to any of the above is included, and in other cases, the second terminal is not included. In addition, the region surrounded by the dashed line does not include the first terminal which handles a signal directly related to either the advantage of the game or the acquisition of the game medium as a terminal. A second terminal for handling signals not directly related to any of the acquisitions is included.

  Here, the first terminal and the fourth wiring, which handle signals directly related to either the game advantage or the acquisition of the game medium, are, for example, terminals and wiring related to signal input to the main CPU 61, and the main CPU 61 (payout). Terminals and wiring related to signal output from the control means 110) to the hopper unit 43 (hopper motor 57). In addition, the second terminal and the third wiring that handle signals that are not directly related to any of the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium are provided, for example, from the main CPU 61 (stop control means 106) to the left, middle, and right reels 13L and 13M. , 13R, and terminals and wires related to signal output to components (left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R), and components related to credit display from the main CPU 61 (credit display control unit 116). Terminals and wires related to signal output to the credit indicator 45) or terminals and wires related to signal output from the main CPU 61 (cancel control means 117) to components (medal selector 48) related to game medium cancellation (medal selector 48). It is. The term "terminal" used herein includes not only a terminal of a component, but also a via, a through hole, and the like that can be easily conducted by a wrongdoer with a wire or the like. Further, even for components of the same type, depending on the signal to be handled, the terminal and wiring of the component may be the first terminal and the fourth wiring, or may be the second terminal and the third wiring. For example, an IC 81 described below surrounded by a dashed line is an IC related to the second terminal and the third wiring, and an IC 82 described later surrounded by a dotted line is an IC related to the first terminal and the fourth wiring. Board wiring is included in the wiring that handles signals directly related to either the game advantage or the acquisition of game media, and the wiring that handles signals that are not directly related to either the game advantage or the acquisition of game media. Make it not exist.

  As shown in FIG. 63, a ratio indicator 69 is mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63. The ratio indicator 69 is formed of a package such as a DIP, in which the terminal of the ratio indicator 69 is not provided in a central area on an opposite surface (a lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) facing the arrangement surface of the 7-segment display. ing. When such a ratio display 69 is mounted on the main control board 63, one surface 63 </ b> A of the main control board 63 and the surface of the ratio display 69 facing the one surface 63 </ b> A (the lower surface of the ratio display 69). There is a risk that an IC may be illegally hidden and mounted in this gap.

  On one surface 63A of the main control board 63, connectors CN1, CN2, ICs 81, 83, 84, 85, diodes 91, resistor groups 92, 94, and a transistor 93 are mounted around a ratio indicator 69. ing. The connector CN1, CN2, the ICs 81, 83, 84, 85, the diode 91, the resistor groups 92, 94, and the transistor 93 are provided with a second terminal, or the ratio display 69 is provided with a second terminal. And the first terminal is not arranged, or the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio display 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, between the first terminal of the connector CN2 in the area surrounded by the dotted line and the ratio display 69, the second area of the area surrounded by the one-dot chain line on the ratio display 69 side of the connector CN2 is connected. The terminals are arranged, the second terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side, and the connector CN2 without the first terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side.

  As shown in FIG. 63, an IC 82 and a main CPU 61 are mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be adjacent to the IC 81 and positioned between the own component and the ratio display 69. Have been. The IC 82 and the main CPU 61 are provided with a first terminal on the ratio display 69 side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, the second terminal is disposed between the first terminal of the IC 82 and the first terminal of the main CPU 61 and the ratio display 69, and the first terminal is disposed. No IC81 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 63, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, the resistor groups 92, 94 and the transistor 93 are adjacent to the resistor groups 92, 94, and between the own component and the ratio indicator 69. A capacitor group 95 is mounted so as to be located. A first terminal is arranged in the capacitor group 95. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, between the first terminal of the capacitor group 95 and the ratio indicator 69, the second terminal is arranged, and the resistor groups 92, 94 where the first terminal is not arranged, This means that the transistor 93 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the connector CN2, the transistor 93, and the resistor group 94 are located on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, adjacent to the connector CN2, between the own component and the ratio display 69. Thus, the connector CN3 is mounted. The first terminal is arranged on the connector CN3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, between the first terminal of the connector CN3 and the ratio indicator 69, the second terminal is arranged, and the resistor groups 92 and 94 and the transistor 93 where the first terminal is not arranged are arranged. The second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side, and the connector CN2 without the first terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side.

  According to the arrangement of FIG. 63 described above, between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69, there is a component in which the first terminal is not arranged or in which the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. It is installed. Therefore, one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the lower surface of the ratio display 69 correspond to a gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 opposite to the display surface on which the 7-segment display of the ratio display 69 is arranged. Even if the IC is improperly hidden and mounted in the gap between the one surface 63A and the opposing surface (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69), the wiring extending from the improperly hidden and mounted IC is connected to the first terminal. To avoid components mounted between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 (components where the first terminal is not arranged or where the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side). It is necessary to lay wiring that extends from an IC mounted in a concealed manner. For example, in order to connect the wiring 185 extending from the IC mounted illegally and concealed to the first terminal 82b of the IC 82, the wiring 185 should avoid the IC 81 mounted between the first terminal 82b and the ratio display 69. Need to be laid. For this reason, the length of wiring extending from an illegally hidden and mounted IC becomes long, and it becomes easy to find an illegally hidden IC.

  In order to connect the IC illegally hidden in the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 to the first terminal in the area surrounded by the dotted line of the connector CN3, the first terminal must be located at a position other than the ratio display 69. Is arranged, and it is necessary to lay out the connector CN2 in which the second terminal is arranged on the ratio display 69 side. In this way, even if the first terminal is arranged and the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side, the components arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69 are illegally hidden. It can be handled as an effective component for finding the IC that has been made.

  In addition, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 69 is surrounded by a component in which the first terminal is not arranged or a component in which the first terminal is not arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Alternatively, for all of the first terminals, the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal and the ratio indicator 69, or a component without the first terminal is arranged on the ratio indicator 69 side. Is preferred. By the way, in the first terminal having a large distance from the ratio indicator 69, the linear distance between the first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 is long. Even if wiring for connecting the IC and the fraudulently hidden IC is laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes long, and it is easy to find a fraudulently hidden IC. On the other hand, in the first terminal having a small distance from the ratio indicator 69, the linear distance between the first terminal and the IC illegally hidden in the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 becomes shorter, If the wiring for connecting the first terminal and the illegally hidden IC can be laid in a straight line, the wiring becomes short, and it is difficult to find the illegally hidden IC. For this reason, among the plurality of first terminals, at least the first terminal is not arranged between the first terminal closest to the ratio indicator 69 and the ratio indicator 69, or the first terminal is located on the side of the ratio indicator 69. It is sufficient that a component on which the first terminal is not arranged is mounted.

  Next, the laying of wiring on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 64A, a first wiring 161 for VDD and a second wiring 162 for GND are laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the corresponding area 63 </ b> C opposite to the ratio display 69 (in FIG. 64, simply described as “display (display component)”) on one surface of the main control board 63. Here, the first wiring 161 is a wiring for supplying VDD to the ratio display 69. In FIG. 64A, the first wiring 161 is laid in the facing region 63C. However, both the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 may not be laid in the facing region 63C. Instead of laying the first wiring 161 on the 63C, the second wiring 162 may be laid. Further, the first wiring may be for GND and the second wiring may be for VDD.

  FIG. 64B is an example different from the embodiment, in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND correspond to the main control board corresponding to immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69. It is laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so as to be laid also on the opposing area 63C of the main control board 63. In this case, one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and a surface (a lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 facing the one surface 63A, which corresponds to a gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the fraudulent IC 191 that requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in the gap so as to hide the fraudulent IC 191, the fraudulent IC 191 is connected to the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 in order to supply VDD and GND to the fraudulent IC 191. Since the wiring 192A and the wiring 192B are completed in the facing area 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, it is impossible to visually recognize an improper trace from outside.

  FIG. 64C shows an embodiment, in which both the first wiring 161 for VDD and the second wiring 162 for GND are laid on one surface 63 </ b> A of the main control board 63. The second wiring 162 is not laid in the opposing area 63C of the main control board 63 which is directly below the main control board 63. In this case, one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and a surface (a lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 facing the one surface 63A, which corresponds to a gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. When the fraudulent IC 191 that requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in the gap so as to hide it, the wiring 192A for connecting the fraudulent IC 191 and the first wiring 161 corresponds to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69. The wiring 192B for connecting the unauthorized IC 191 and the second wiring 162 corresponds to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69, although it is not visible from the outside because it is completed in the facing area 63C of the main control board 63. Cannot be completed in the opposing area 63C of the main control board 63, and a part of the wiring 192B is It would be laid in an area visible to easy. Therefore, even if the unauthorized IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, the unauthorized IC 191 is not removed. Since a part of the wiring 192B for connecting to the wiring 162 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio display 69, the fraudulent IC 191 can be easily found.

  The second wiring 162 may not be laid in the peripheral area of the opposing area 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. According to this, a portion of the wiring 192B for connecting the unauthorized IC 191 to the second wiring 162 that can be visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69 becomes longer. Discovery of a fraudulent IC 191 mounted so as to be hidden in a gap between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap and a surface of the ratio indicator 69 facing the one surface 63A (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69). Becomes easier.

  Next, a modification example related to the laying of the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, a module configured by mounting a ratio display 69 corresponding to a display component on a substrate 70 and a driver for driving the ratio display 69 (“display including display component (display unit)”) Is mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63. This board 70 is attached to a connector 79 mounted on one surface 63A of the main control board 63. Here, since there is the connector 79 directly below the substrate 70, there is no gap enough to illegally hide an IC or the like. For this reason, even in the case of FIG. Even when the terminals of the board 70 are fixed to the main control board 63 by double-sided soldering, there is a gap just below the board 70 because the terminals of the board 70 can be hidden illegally. do not do. For this reason, the place where the IC or the like is hidden illegally is a gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69.

  As shown in FIG. 65, a first wiring 161 and a second wiring 162 are laid on one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and the first wiring 161 and the second wiring 162 drive the above-described driver. Therefore, the main control board 63 is also laid in the area 63D facing the board 70 on one surface 63A. By the way, the second wiring 162 is not laid in the area 70C of the substrate 70 facing the ratio indicator 69 (corresponding directly below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the surface 70A facing the ratio indicator 69. With this configuration, similarly to the case of FIG. 64, the opposing surface 70A of the substrate 70 corresponding to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 and the opposing surface of the substrate 70 of the ratio indicator 69 (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) ) Can easily find an IC that is illegally hidden in the gap between the IC. In addition, the second wiring 162 is not laid also around the opposing area 70 </ b> C of the substrate 70 corresponding to the area immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69.

  Further, a modified example of the wiring laying on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 on which a ratio display 69 (in FIG. 66, simply described as "display (display component)") is mounted, there is provided a VDD third display. 1 wiring 161, second wiring 162 for GND, third wiring 163 for handling a signal not directly related to any of the advantage of the game and acquisition of the game medium, direct to any of the advantage of the game and acquisition of the game medium A fourth wiring 164 for handling related signals is laid. The first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 are provided in a region 63C of the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 facing the ratio display 69, which is directly below the lower surface of the ratio display 69. Although it is laid, the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring 164 are not laid in the opposing region 63C. Furthermore, it is preferable that the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 be laid in almost the entire area of the opposing area 63C according to a design rule in which the distance between the wirings is minimum.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), a second wiring 162 for GND is laid on a surface (a surface on which no components are mounted) 63B opposite to one surface (component mounting surface) 63A of the main control board 63. It may be.

  According to the wiring arrangement described with reference to FIG. 66 (a), as shown in FIG. When the erroneous IC 191 which requires both VDD and GND for operation is mounted in a gap between the one surface 63A of the display 69 and the opposite surface (the lower surface of the ratio display 69), the illicit IC 191 is placed in the first position. The wiring 192A for connecting to the wiring 161 is laid in a region that cannot be visually recognized from the outside, and attempts to connect to the second wiring 162 laid on the opposite surface 63B of the main control board 63, which is the shortest distance from the unauthorized IC 191. However, when making a hole in the main control board 63 and trying to connect it to the second wiring 162 laid on the opposite surface 63B of the main control board 63, the main control board 63 is laid in the opposing area 63C corresponding to immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69. The wiring (first wiring, third wiring) that has been cut is cut off (193 in the figure), or the wiring (first wiring, third wiring) laid in the facing area 63C is short-circuited with the second wiring 162. Therefore, the slot machine does not operate normally. As a result, it is possible to know that the fraud has been committed.

  Further, a gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface (the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69) of the ratio indicator 69 facing the one surface 63A, which corresponds to a gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69, is provided. When the fraudulent IC 191 is mounted so as to hide the fraudulent IC 191, the wiring 192C for connecting the fraudulent IC 191 to the fourth wiring 164 is completed in the opposing area 63C of the main control board 63 corresponding to immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69. Therefore, a part of the wiring 192C is laid in a region that can be easily viewed from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio indicator 69. Therefore, even if the fraudulent IC 191 is mounted so as to be hidden in the gap between the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 corresponding to the gap immediately below the lower surface of the ratio display 69 and the lower surface of the ratio display 69, the fraudulent IC 191 will be in the fourth position. Since a part of the illegal wiring for connecting to the wiring 164 can be easily visually recognized from the outside without being disturbed by the ratio display 69, it is easy to find the illegal IC 191 and the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium are reduced. It is possible to prevent fraud.

  62 and 64, a ratio display 69 (corresponding to a “display”) is a module (“display unit”) in which a display component and a driver for driving the display component are mounted on a substrate 70. ).

  In FIG. 66, a ratio display 69 (corresponding to a “display”) is a module (corresponding to a “display unit”) in which a display component and a driver for driving the display component are mounted on a substrate 70. May be replaced by In this case, the first wiring 161 and / or the third wiring 163 are laid immediately below the lower surface of the display component on the surface of the substrate 70 facing the display component, but the second wiring 162 and the fourth wiring 163 are provided. The wiring 164 is not laid. In addition, the first wiring 161 or the third wiring 163 or the third wiring 163 or the first wiring 163 in the design rule in which the distance between the wirings is almost the entire area directly under the lower surface of the display component on the surface facing the display component of the substrate 70. It is preferable to lay both.

  The mounting of the display device on the main control board includes a case where the display component is directly mounted on the main control board and a case where the display unit including the display component is mounted on the main control board. For example, in order to mount the ratio display 69 on the main control board 63, when the ratio display 69 is directly mounted on the main control board 63, the display unit having the driver and the ratio display 69 mounted on the board 70 is controlled by the main control. The case where it is mounted on the substrate 63 is included.

  The layout relationship of components (connectors, ratio display, main CPU, IC, etc.) and wiring mounted on the main control board 63 described with reference to FIG. 5, FIG. 62 to FIG. (Pachinko machines). Here, as a signal that is directly related to one of the game advantage and the acquisition of the game medium, for example, a game state (a normal probability jackpot state, a high probability jackpot (probability variation) state, and the like), a jackpot, and a game ball For example, the driving of a reel in the case of a drum type is assumed to be related to a signal that is not directly related to any of the advantage of the game and the acquisition of the game medium.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 provided with the display window 11 on the front surface of which the reel can be visually recognized, a visibility preventing means for preventing the ratio display 69 from being seen when the inside of the housing 3 is viewed from the display window 11 is provided. You may. As the visibility preventing means, for example, the ratio display 69 is attached to the upper part of the support frame 13 (see FIG. 4) that supports each of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R, when the inside of the housing 3 is viewed from the display window 11. Provide a shield plate large enough to hide. According to this, since the display content of the ratio display 69 cannot be confirmed unless the front door 5 is opened, an unauthorized person can check whether or not the display content of the ratio display 69 has an abnormal value due to fraud. It can be prevented from being used to confirm whether or not the state is confirmed by the inspector to confirm that the fraud is detected, and the player confirms the display content of the ratio display 69 to predict the set value or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the player checks the ratio display 69 in a front view, the display content can be checked, and when the player checks the ratio display 69 in a perspective view, a specific means for preventing the display content from being checked may be provided. As the specifying means, for example, a polarizing film attached to the substrate case CS, a mesh formed on the substrate case CS, a wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69, and the like. In this case, the wall provided so as to cover the periphery of the ratio indicator 69 is formed so as to protrude from the upper surface of the substrate case CS toward the inside of the housing, so that the display contents can be more effectively confirmed by the above perspective. Can be hindered. Further, auxiliary means for assisting the confirmation of the display content may be provided only when the player confirms the ratio display 69 in a front view. The auxiliary means is, for example, a magnifying lens provided only at a location in front view. Further, the ratio display 69 may be arranged at a position where the display of the ratio display 69 is difficult to see in a perspective view. For example, in a state where the main control board 63 is mounted inside the housing 3 as shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is provided on the shaft side when the door is opened. According to these, even if a clerk opens the front door 5 in order to eliminate the cause of the error that occurred during the game, the player cannot easily check the display contents of the ratio display 69, so that it is not intended. Confirmation of the display content of the player's ratio display 69 can be prevented.

  Subsequently, the signal output of the external centralized terminal board 59 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, an output signal of the external central terminal board 59 in the present embodiment will be described. However, the numbers in FIG. 67 correspond to the terminal numbers of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 in FIG. 68 described later.

  The medal insertion signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is output when the start switch 19 is received. This medal insertion signal is defined as one high-level period of the time length H1 and one low-level period of the time length L1 corresponding to one medal insertion as one unit, and a signal related to the one unit is one game. The number of medals inserted is repeated for the specified number (three in the present embodiment), and is output to a hall computer or the like from the terminal with the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59. Note that the time length H1 and the time length L1 may be the same or different.

  The medal payout signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is output when the medal is paid out after all three reels have stopped. Things. In this medal payout signal, one High level period of the time length H2 corresponding to one medal payout and one Low level period of the time length L2 are defined as one unit, and the signal related to the one unit is one game. The number of medals paid out is repeatedly output from the terminal with the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 to a hall computer or the like. However, at the time of replay, it is assumed that medals have been paid out for the specified number of medals inserted in one game (three in this embodiment), and the signal for one unit is repeatedly output for the specified number of medals. Note that the time length H2 and the time length L2 may be the same or different. Further, the time length H2 and the time length L2 may be the same as or different from the time length H1 and the time length L1, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown in FIG. 67, as an output signal from the terminal with the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, in addition to the medal payout signal, the ID There is an information signal, the above ratio information signal, and the above error information signal. The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are composed of a plurality of bits. For each of the plurality of bits, for example, when the bit value is “1”, one High level period having a time length H3 and A signal in which one Low level period of the time length L3 is one unit, and a bit value “0” is a signal in which one Low level period of the time length H3 + L3 is one unit. The terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o is output to a hall computer or the like. When the bit value is “0”, the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are signals in which one High level period of the time length H3 and one Low level period of the time length L3 are one unit. When the bit value is “1”, the signal may be a signal in which one Low level period of the time length H3 + L3 is one unit. Further, the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are signals in which the high level or the low level of the time length H3 + L3 is set to one unit when the bit value is “1”, and when the bit value is “0”. A signal in which the Low level or the High level of the time length H3 + L3 is one unit may be used. Further, the above-mentioned time length H3 and time length L3 may be the same or different. However, in the case of FIG. 69 described later, the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal transmit all the bits constituting them in the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period, respectively. In order to be able to do so, it is assumed that the time length of a signal per unit is determined.

  Note that the medal insertion signal corresponds to the “first signal” of the present invention, the medal payout signal corresponds to the “second signal” of the present invention, and the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal correspond to the “first signal” of the present invention. Third signal ". Also, the terminal portion of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 in FIG. 68 having the terminal number "1" corresponds to the "first signal line" of the present invention, and the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 in FIG. The terminal part with the terminal number “2” corresponds to the “second signal line” of the present invention. The portion including the terminal portion of the terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o and the terminal portion of the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 in FIG. 68 corresponds to the "signal output circuit" of the present invention. Equivalent to.

  The RB signal is output to a hall computer or the like from the terminal with the terminal number “3” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is continuously output in the regular bonus state. Signal. The RB signal is a signal corresponding to the external signal 1 in FIG.

  The BB signal is output to a hall computer or the like from the terminal with the terminal number "4" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is continuously output in the big bonus state. Signal. Note that the BB signal is a signal corresponding to the external signal 2 in FIG.

  The AT signal is output to a hall computer or the like from the terminal with the terminal number "5" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is a high-level signal that is continuously output during AT. . Note that the AT signal is a signal corresponding to the external signal 3 in FIG.

  The security signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number "7" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 to a hall computer or the like. Is a High-level signal output when at least one of the above is satisfied. Note that the security signal is a signal corresponding to the external signal 4 in FIG.

  The door opening signal is output from the terminal number "8" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 to a hall computer or the like, and is continuously output while the front door 5 is open. This is a high-level signal. The door opening signal is a signal corresponding to the external signal 5 in FIG.

  The relay common is related to the terminal with the terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and is a common signal of seven relays (see FIG. 68).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the configuration of the external concentration terminal plate 59 in the present embodiment will be described.

  The external centralized terminal board 59 includes an input connector 59i for receiving a signal from the main CPU 61 on the main board 63, relay coils 59-11 to 59-17, and relay coils 59-11 to 59 driven by drive signals from the main CPU 61. It is provided with contacts 59-21 to 59-27, which are switched between an on state and an off state by the driving of -17, and an output connector 59o for transmitting a high level signal and a low level signal to the hall computer. The relay coil 59-11 and the contact 59-21 constitute a relay, the relay coil 59-12 and the contact 59-22 constitute a relay, and the relay coil 59-13 and the contact 59-23 constitute a relay. , Relay coil 59-14 and contact 59-24 constitute a relay, relay coil 59-15 and contact 59-25 constitute a relay, and relay coil 59-16 and contact 59-26 constitute a relay. The relay coil 59-17 and the contacts 59-27 constitute a relay, and the external central terminal board 59 of FIG. 68 includes a total of seven relays.

  One terminal of each of the contacts 59-21 to 59-27 is connected to a common terminal (in the present embodiment, the terminal with the terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o), and the other terminal is connected to the output connector 59o. Are connected to separate terminals. Specifically, the other terminals of the contacts 59-21, 59-22, 59-23, 59-24, 59-25, 59-26, 59-27 are respectively the terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o. Terminal, terminal with terminal number "2", terminal with terminal number "3", terminal with terminal number "4", terminal with terminal number "5", terminal with terminal number "7", terminal with terminal number "8" It is connected to the. The input connector includes a ground (ground) terminal and a power supply terminal, but their illustration is omitted in FIG.

  The terminal with the terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o is a common terminal (common). When the contacts 59-21 are turned on, the terminal (common terminal) of the terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the terminal of the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal (this embodiment) In the embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal having the terminal number “1”, and when the contact 59-21 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) having the terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the terminal of the output connector 59o are connected. The terminal with the terminal number “1” becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “1”. Also, when the contact 59-22 is turned on, the terminal (common terminal) of the output connector 59o having the terminal number "6" and the terminal having the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal ( In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “2”, and when the contact 59-22 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal No. 59o having the terminal number “2” becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low-level signal is output from the terminal number “2”. When the contacts 59-23 are turned on, the terminal (common terminal) of the output connector 59o with the terminal number "6" and the terminal of the output connector 59o with the terminal number "3" are electrically connected, and the signal level of the common terminal ( In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “3”, and when the contact 59-23 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal of the terminal number “3” of 59o becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low-level signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number “3”. When the contacts 59-24 are turned on, the terminal (common terminal) having the terminal number "6" of the output connector 59o and the terminal having the terminal number "4" of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal ( In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “4”, and when the contact 59-24 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal with the terminal number “4” of 59o becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “4”. When the contact 59-25 is turned on, the terminal (common terminal) of the output connector 59o having the terminal number "6" and the terminal having the terminal number "5" of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal (the common terminal) is changed. In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “5”, and when the contact 59-25 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal 59o of the terminal number "5" becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low level signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number "5". When the contacts 59-26 are turned on, the terminal (common terminal) having the terminal number "6" of the output connector 59o and the terminal having the terminal number "7" of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal ( In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “7”, and when the contact 59-26 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal 59o of the terminal number “7” becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low-level signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number “7”. When the contacts 59-27 are turned on, the terminal (common terminal) of the terminal number "6" of the output connector 59o and the terminal of the terminal number "8" of the output connector 59o conduct, and the signal level of the common terminal ( In the present embodiment, a signal of High level) is output from the terminal of terminal number “8”, and when the contact 59-27 is turned off, the terminal (common terminal) of terminal number “6” of the output connector 59o and the output connector The terminal 59o of the terminal number “8” becomes non-conductive, and in this embodiment, a Low-level signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number “8”.

  When outputting a High-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 (see FIG. 6) of the main CPU 61 relays the signal from the terminal with the terminal number “1” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on the contact 59-21 is supplied to the coil 59-11 and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o, the terminal number of the input connector 59i is changed to "1". A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-21 is supplied from the terminal "1" to the relay coil 59-11.

  In the present embodiment, when the start switch 19 is operated after inserting a predetermined number of medals required for one game, for example, the external output signal control means 119 sets the time length corresponding to the first medal insertion. A drive signal for turning on the H1 minute contact 59-21 is supplied from the terminal of the terminal number "1" of the input connector 59i to the relay coil 59-11, and then the time length L1 minute contact 59-21 is supplied to the relay coil 59-11. A drive signal for turning off is supplied to the relay coil 59-11 from the terminal with the terminal number "1" of the input connector 59i, whereby the first medal is inserted from the terminal with the terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o. , A signal composed of one High level period of the time length H1 and one Low level period of the time length L1 is output. Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 performs the same operation as that of the first medal insertion corresponding to each of the second and third medals inserted, whereby the terminal number “ From the terminal "1", a signal including one High level period of the time length H1 and one Low level period of the time length L1 corresponding to each of the second and third medals inserted is output. In this manner, the external output signal control means 119 responds to the information (corresponding to the "first information" of the present invention) relating to the medal insertion by setting one High level period of the time length H1 and one of the time length L1. A signal composed of two Low level periods is defined as one unit, and a medal insertion signal composed of a square wave obtained by repeating the one unit by a predetermined number required for one game is generated. The signal is output from the terminal of the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o of the terminal plate 59 to a hall computer or the like.

  When outputting a High-level signal from the terminal of the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-12 from the terminal of the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-22 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o, the relay is connected with the terminal with the terminal number “2” on the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-22 is supplied to the coil 59-12.

  In the present embodiment, the external output signal control means 119 outputs the drive signal for turning on the contact 59-22 for the time length H2 for the first coin in the medal payout, according to the terminal number of the input connector 59i. A drive signal for supplying the relay coil 59-12 from the terminal of “2” to the relay coil 59-12 and then turning off the contact 59-22 for the time length L2 is relayed from the terminal of terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i. It is supplied to the coil 59-12, whereby one High level period of the time length H2 and one Low level period of the time length L2 corresponding to the first medal payout from the terminal of the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o. Is output. If there is a payout of the second and subsequent medals, the external output signal control means 119 performs the same operation as the first payout of the medal in response to each of the payouts of the second and subsequent medals. As a result, a signal consisting of one High level period of the time length H2 and one Low level period of the time length L2 corresponding to the second and subsequent medals payout from the terminal of the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o is output. Is done. In this way, the external output signal control means 119 responds to the information relating to the medal payout (corresponding to the “second information” of the present invention) by setting one High level period of the time length H2 and one of the time length L2. A signal composed of two Low level periods is defined as one unit, and a medal payout signal composed of a square wave obtained by repeating the one unit by the number of medal payouts is generated. The signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o to a hall computer or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are each composed of a plurality of bits, and the external output signal control unit 119 outputs a bit value “1” to each of the plurality of bits. In this case, the drive signal for turning on the contact 59-22 for the time length H3 is supplied from the terminal of the terminal number "2" of the input connector 59i to the relay coil 59-12. A drive signal for turning off the L3 minute contact 59-22 is supplied to the relay coil 59-12 from the terminal of the terminal number "2" of the input connector 59i, and when the bit value is "0", the above-mentioned time length is used. A drive signal for turning off the H3 + L3 minute contact 59-22 is supplied to the relay coil 59-12 from the terminal number "2" of the input connector 59i. A signal consisting of one High level period of time length H3 and one Low level period of time length L3 corresponding to each bit of bit value “1” is output from the terminal of terminal number “2” of o, A signal consisting of one Low level period of time length H3 + L3 corresponding to each bit of bit value “0” is output. In this way, the external output signal control unit 119 corresponds to the ID information, the ratio information, and the error information (the ID information, the ratio information, and the error information each correspond to the “third information” of the present invention). In the case of a bit having a bit value "1", a signal including one High level period having a time length H3 and one Low level period having a time length L3 is defined as one unit. A signal consisting of one Low level period of time length H3 + L3 is defined as one unit, and an ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal composed of a square wave obtained by repeating these one unit for a plurality of bits are generated. The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output from the terminal with the terminal number "2" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 to a hall computer or the like.

  Further, when outputting a High-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “3” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-13 from the terminal with the terminal number “3” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-23 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number "3" of the output connector 59o, a relay is made from the terminal with the terminal number "3" of the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-23 is supplied to the coil 59-13. Further, when outputting a High-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “4” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-14 from the terminal with the terminal number “4” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-24 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number "4" of the output connector 59o, the relay is connected from the terminal with the terminal number "4" of the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-24 is supplied to the coil 59-14. Further, when outputting a high-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “5” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-15 from the terminal with the terminal number “5” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-25 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number "5" of the output connector 59o, a relay is made from the terminal with the terminal number "5" of the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-25 is supplied to the coil 59-15. Further, when outputting a High-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “7” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-16 from the terminal with the terminal number “6” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-26 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “7” of the output connector 59o, the relay is connected with the terminal with the terminal number “6” on the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-26 is supplied to the coil 59-16. Further, when outputting a high-level signal from the terminal with the terminal number “8” of the output connector 59o, the external output signal control means 119 contacts the relay coil 59-17 from the terminal with the terminal number “7” on the input connector 59i. When a drive signal for turning on 59-27 is supplied and a low-level signal is output from the terminal with the terminal number “8” of the output connector 59o, the relay is connected with the terminal with the terminal number “7” on the input connector 59i. A drive signal for turning off the contact 59-27 is supplied to the coil 59-17.

  However, the external output signal control means 119 (see FIG. 6) of the main CPU 61 corresponds to "signal generation means" of the present invention.

  Note that the process of outputting the medal insertion signal from the terminal with the terminal number “1” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 is performed in the external signal output process (step S446) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. Specifically, this is performed in setting the output signal of the first signal line in the external signal output processing of FIG. 32 (step S501). The output processing of the medal payout signal, the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal from the terminal with the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 is performed in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. This is performed in the external signal output process (step S446), and more specifically, is performed in setting the output signal of the second signal line in the external signal output process of FIG. 32 (step S502). Further, the process of outputting the security signal (external signal 4) from the terminal with the terminal number "7" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 is performed in the external signal output process (step S446) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 32. More specifically, the processing is performed in steps S508 to S512 in the external signal output processing of FIG. Further, the output processing of the door opening signal (external signal 5) from the terminal with the terminal number “8” of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 is performed by the external signal output processing in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 30 (step S446). More specifically, the processing is performed in steps S503 to S507 in the external signal output processing of FIG.

  Also, the output processing of the RB signal (external signal 1) from the terminal with the terminal number "3" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59, and the output of the BB signal (external signal 2) from the terminal with the terminal number "4" The processing and the output processing of the AT signal (external signal 3) from the terminal with the terminal number "5" are omitted in the flowchart of the main processing in FIG. 21, but are performed in the main processing in FIG.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the signal output of the first signal line and the signal output of the second signal line in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. However, the first signal line output in FIG. 69 corresponds to the output of the terminal of terminal number "1" of the output connector 59o of the external centralized terminal board 59 in FIG. 68, and the second signal line output is the external centralized terminal board in FIG. This corresponds to the output of the terminal with the terminal number “2” of the output connector 59o of 59.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 performs the first repetition of three times (the specified number of medal insertions) of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal output from the first signal line. During the 1-1 period from the rise of the square wave for the unit, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the 1-2 period from the rise of the square wave for one unit in the second repetition. Is configured such that the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line in the first to third periods from the rise of the square wave for one unit of the third repetition. It is configured as follows. Further, the slot machine 1 is configured to be able to output an ID information signal from the second signal line in a 1-1 period corresponding to a first repetition of a medal insertion signal in which no medal payout signal is output from the second signal line, The ratio information signal can be output from the second signal line in the 1-2 period corresponding to the second repetition of the medal insertion signal in which the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the medal payout is performed from the second signal line. The error information signal can be output from the second signal line in the first to third periods corresponding to the third repetition of the medal shooting signal in which no signal is output.

  In the present embodiment, the 1-1 period is a period from the rise of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal to the fall of the square wave, and the 1-2 period and the 1-3 period are Each is a period from the rise of the square wave for one unit to the time before the fall of the square wave in the medal insertion signal. In addition, the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period respectively correspond to the “first period” of the present invention.

  For example, when the player inserts a prescribed number (three) of medals and operates the start switch 19, the external output signal control means 119 of the main CPU 61 sets the terminal of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59. A drive signal for turning on the contact 59-21 is supplied from the terminal of the number "1" to the relay coil 59-11 for a predetermined period from the time T1, and then the contact 59-21 is turned off until the time T2. By supplying a drive signal for performing the above operation, a square wave for one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion signal output from the first signal line to the hall computer or the like is generated. A square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion signal is output from the first signal line during a period from time T1 to time T2.

  In addition, the external output signal control means 119 controls the external concentration in the 1-1 period from time T1 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion) to time TA1. By sequentially supplying drive signals corresponding to the respective bit values of a plurality of bits forming the ID information from the terminal of the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i of the terminal plate 59 to the relay coil 59-12, An ID information signal to be output from two signal lines to a hall computer or the like is generated. This ID information signal is output from the second signal line during the 1-1 period from time T1 to time TA1 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 turns on the contacts 59-21 from the terminal of the terminal number "1" of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 to the relay coil 59-11 for a predetermined period from time T2. A second drive signal is supplied from the first signal line to a hall computer or the like by supplying a drive signal for turning off the contacts 59-21 until time T3. A square wave for one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to is generated. A square wave for one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion is output from the first signal line during a period from time T2 to time T3.

  In addition, the external output signal control unit 119 controls the external concentration in the 1-2 period from time T2 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion signal) to time TA2. By sequentially supplying drive signals corresponding to the respective bit values of the plurality of bits constituting the ratio information from the terminal of the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i of the terminal plate 59 to the relay coil 59-12, A ratio information signal output from two signal lines to a hall computer or the like is generated. This ratio information signal is output from the second signal line during the 1-2 period from time T2 to time TA2 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 turns on the contacts 59-21 for a predetermined period from the time T3 from the terminal of the terminal number "1" of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 to the relay coil 59-11. A third drive signal is supplied from the first signal line to a hall computer or the like by supplying a drive signal for turning off the contacts 59-21 until time T4. A square wave for one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to is generated. A square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion is output from the first signal line during a period from time T3 to time T4.

  Further, the external output signal control unit 119 controls the external output signal during the period 1-3 from time T3 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion signal) to time TA3. By sequentially supplying drive signals corresponding to the respective bit values of a plurality of bits forming the error information from the terminal having the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i of the terminal plate 59 to the relay coil 59-12, An error information signal to be output to a hall computer or the like from two signal lines is generated. This error information signal is output from the second signal line during the first to third periods from time T3 to time TA3 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  In the game, when two medals are paid out by winning the middle-stage cherry (see FIG. 8), the external output signal control means 119 relays the signal from the terminal with the terminal number "2" of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 to the relay. A drive signal for turning on contact 59-22 is supplied to coil 59-12 for a predetermined period from time T5, and thereafter a drive signal for turning off contact 59-22 is supplied until time T6. As a result, a square wave for one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the first medal payout signal output from the second signal line to the hall computer or the like is generated. A square wave of one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the first medal payout signal is output from the second signal line during a period from time T5 to time T6.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 turns on the contacts 59-22 from the terminal of the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 to the relay coil 59-12 for a predetermined period from time T6. A second drive signal is supplied from the second signal line to a hall computer or the like by supplying a drive signal for turning off the contact 59-22 until time T7. A square wave for one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to is generated. A square wave for one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the second medal payout signal is output from the second signal line during a period from time T6 to time T7.

  Note that the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line during the period when the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line. At T7, no medal insertion signal is output.

  According to the first embodiment, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line in the 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 periods from the rising of the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. And the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the like using the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period in which the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. An error information signal is output. Then, an ID information signal is output from the second signal line corresponding to the first square wave of the medal insertion signal, and the ratio information signal is output to the second signal line corresponding to the second square wave of the medal insertion signal. And outputs an error information signal from the second signal line in accordance with the third square wave of the medal insertion signal. For this reason, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load to the slot machine 1. In addition, a hall computer or the like uses whether or not the first period, the second period, and the first period from the rising edge of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal, and uses the first period, the first period, and the first period. It is determined that the signals output from the second signal line during the -2 period and the 1-3 period are the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal as the third signal. The signal output from the second signal line during periods other than the 1-2 period and the 1-3 period can be determined to be the medal payout signal as the second signal. The hall computer or the like uses the number of repetitions of the three square waves that constitute the medal insertion signal to determine whether the third signal output from the second signal line is an ID information signal or a ratio information signal. , Or the error information signal. For this reason, it is not necessary for the hall computer or the like to analyze the identification bits as in the case of transmitting the identification bits for identifying the type of the third signal, and it is possible to avoid a complicated configuration of the hall computer and the like. become. For example, in the repetition of three square waves constituting the medal insertion signal, the time from the fall of the first repetition to the rise of the second repetition or the time from the fall of the second repetition to the third repetition The time until the rise is shorter than the time from the fall of the third repetition of a certain medal insertion signal to the rise of the first repetition of the next medal insertion signal of the certain medal insertion signal. If the time from the start to the start is long, it is determined that the medal insertion signal is the first repetition, the next repetition determined as the first repetition is determined as the second repetition, and the second repetition is determined. The next repetition is determined to be the third repetition. By doing so, the hall computer or the like can easily determine the number of repetitions.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the medal insertion and the medal payout do not occur at the same time. By using the combination of the information related to the insertion of medals and the information related to the payout of medals without using, the existing first signal line and the existing second signal line are effectively used, and the number of signal lines is reduced. As many signals can be transmitted.

  Furthermore, according to the first embodiment, by outputting the ID information of the main CPU 61 or the main board 63 to a hall computer or the like, when the main CPU 61 or the main board 63 itself is replaced, the administrator can easily recognize that. I can figure it out. In addition, by outputting the ratio information to a hall computer or the like, the administrator can go to the slot machine 1 and open the front door 5 of the slot machine 1 without looking at the display of the ratio display 69 to display the abnormality of the ratio. Anomalies in which the calculated value of the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio value can be grasped, and the abnormalities in the ratio of the plurality of slot machines 1 can be collectively managed by a hall computer or the like. Further, by outputting the error information to the hall computer, the administrator can collectively manage the error information by the hall computer or an external server.

  Hereinafter, a modified example of the relationship between the signal output of the first signal line and the signal output of the second signal line described with reference to FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, in addition to the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period in FIG. 69, a first signal (a medal insertion signal in the present modification) on the first signal line is configured. During a period from a predetermined time (corresponding to the “predetermined time” of the present invention, time A in the present embodiment) before the rising of the square wave to the rising of the square wave (hereinafter, referred to as “identification period”). Also, a third signal different from the second signal (medal payout signal in this modification) is configured to be output from the second signal line, and the third signal related to the third signal output from the second signal line is configured. The information is different depending on the time length from the first rise of the third signal in the identification period to the first rise of the first signal after the first rise of the third signal. Here, it is assumed that the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, the 1-3 period, and the identification period are set so as not to overlap. However, the slot machine 1 is configured so that the second signal (medal payout signal in this modification) is not output from the second signal line during the identification period. In this modification, the third signal output from the identification period and the third signal for transmitting the ID information in the 1-1 period constitute an ID information signal, and the third signal output from the identification period. The signal and the third signal transmitting the ratio information in the 1-2 period constitute a ratio information signal, and the third signal output from the identification period and the third signal transmitting the error information in the 1-3 period Constitute an error information signal.

  For example, when the player inserts a prescribed number (three) of medals and operates the start switch 19, one unit (one High corresponding to one medal insertion) from time T1 to time T4 is triggered. A medal insertion signal composed of a square wave of one level consisting of a level period and one Low level period repeated for a prescribed number of medal insertions (three in this embodiment) is output from the first signal line. become.

  At this time, the external output signal control means 119 sends ID information in response to a square wave of one unit of the first medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion signal from the hall computer or the like. In order to make it possible to identify the signal, the third signal rises at a time TB1 which is a time A before the time T1 at which the square wave of the first unit of the medal insertion signal rises, and a certain period after the rise ( The drive signal for causing the third signal to fall after the elapse of this fixed period (the period of time within the identification period) is relayed from the terminal of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 with the terminal number "2". By supplying the signal to the coil 59-12, a signal related to a part for identification in the ID information signal output to the hall computer or the like from the second signal line is generated. The signal related to the identification portion of the ID information signal is output from the second signal line during a certain period from time TB1 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  Then, from time T1 to time T2, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion is output from the first signal line. Also, during the 1-1 period from time T1 to time TA1 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and the ID information of the ID information signal is A signal related to the corresponding portion is output from the second signal line.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 sends the ratio information corresponding to the second unit square wave of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion signal by the hall computer or the like. In order to make it possible to identify the third signal, the third signal rises at a time TB2 which is B minutes earlier than a time T2 at which a second unit square wave of the medal insertion signal rises, and a certain period after the rise ( The drive signal for causing the third signal to fall after the elapse of this fixed period (the period of time within the identification period) is relayed from the terminal of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 with the terminal number "2". By supplying the signal to the coil 59-12, a signal related to the identification portion of the ratio information signal output from the second signal line to the hall computer or the like is generated. The signal related to the identification portion of the ratio information signal is output from the second signal line during a certain period from time TB2 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. Note that the time B is smaller than the time A.

  Then, from time T2 to time T3, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion is output from the first signal line. Also, in the 1-2 period from time T2 to time TA2 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and the ratio information of the ratio information signal is A signal related to the corresponding portion is output from the second signal line.

  Subsequently, the external output signal control means 119 sends the error information in response to the third unit square wave of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion signal by the hall computer or the like. In order to make it possible to identify the third signal, the third signal rises at a time TB3 which is a time C before the time T3 at which the third unit square wave of the medal insertion signal rises, and a certain period after the rise ( The drive signal for causing the third signal to fall after the elapse of this fixed period (the period of time within the identification period) is relayed from the terminal of the input connector 59i of the external centralized terminal board 59 with the terminal number "2". By supplying the signal to the coil 59-12, a signal relating to a portion for identification among error information signals output to a hall computer or the like from the second signal line is generated. The signal related to the identification portion of the error information signal is output from the second signal line during a certain period from time TB3 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. The time C is smaller than the time A and the time B. However, as described above, since the time B is smaller than the time A, the time A, the time B, and the time C are different from each other.

  Then, from time T3 to time T4, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion is output from the first signal line. Also, during the first to third periods from time T3 to time TA3 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and the error information in the error information signal is A signal related to the corresponding portion is output from the second signal line.

  In the game, when two medals are paid out after winning the middle cherry (see FIG. 8), the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed from time T5 to time T6, and corresponds to the first medal payout. A square wave for one unit of the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line, and from time T6 to time T7, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and the medal payout signal corresponding to the second medal payout signal Is output from the second signal line. Note that the slot machine 1 according to the present modification is configured such that the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line during the period when the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line. At T7, no medal insertion signal is output.

  According to the modification described with reference to FIG. 70, the identification period before the rising of the medal insertion signal on the first signal line, the 1-1 period from the rising of the medal insertion signal on the first signal line, the first period, In the 1-2 period and the 1-3 period, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the identification period in which the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line; The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output using the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period. Then, an ID information signal is output from the second signal line corresponding to the first square wave of the medal insertion signal, and the ratio information signal is output to the second signal line corresponding to the second square wave of the medal insertion signal. And outputs an error information signal from the second signal line in accordance with the third square wave of the medal insertion signal. For this reason, it is possible to transmit more signals than the number of signal lines without applying a large transmission load to the slot machine 1. Further, the hall computer or the like uses the identification period before the rise of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal, and whether the period is the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, or the 1-3 period from the rise, and performs the identification. The signals output from the second signal line during the use period, the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period are an ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal as a third signal. It is determined that the signal output from the second signal line other than the discrimination period, the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period is the medal payout signal as the second signal. can do. In addition, the hall computer or the like uses the time length from the rising of the third signal in the identification period to the first rising of the medal insertion signal after the rising of the third signal to output the second signal from the second signal line. It can be determined whether the three signals are an ID information signal, a ratio information signal, or an error information signal. For this reason, it is not necessary for the hall computer or the like to analyze the identification bits as in the case of transmitting the identification bits for identifying the type of the third signal, and it is possible to avoid a complicated configuration of the hall computer and the like. become. The identification bits for identifying the type of the third signal require at least two bits because there are three types of the third information related to the third signal. For example, the identification bit of the ID information is set to “00”. If the identification bit of the ratio information is “01” and the identification bit of the error information is “10”, the hall computer or the like determines whether the content of the transmitted identification bit is “00”, “01”, or “10”. It is necessary to analyze whether or not there is, but in this modification, it is only necessary to determine the time length from the rising of the third signal in the identification period to the first rising of the medal insertion signal after the rising of the third signal.

  Another modification of the relationship between the signal output of the first signal line and the signal output of the second signal line described with reference to FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. However, in the first embodiment of FIG. 69, the first signal (medal insertion signal in the first embodiment) is output from the first signal line, and the second signal (medal payout in the first embodiment) is output from the second signal line. 71) and a third signal (in the first embodiment, an ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal), whereas in another modification of FIG. A signal (medal insertion signal in another modified example) and a fourth signal (ratio information signal in another modified example) composed of a square wave corresponding to the fourth information (ratio information in another modified example) This is different in that the second signal (a medal payout signal in another modified example) and the third signal (an ID information signal in another modified example) are output from the second signal line. Also, in the first embodiment of FIG. 69, the fourth signal is generated in response to each repetition of the number of tokens to be paid out in one unit (one High level period and one Low level period) of the second signal. On the other hand, in the other modified example of FIG. 71, the output is not performed, and in the repetition of the medal payout number of one unit (one High level period and one Low level period) of the second signal in the second modified example of FIG. The difference is that the fourth signal is not output in response to the second repetition, and the fourth signal is output in response to the second repetition. Furthermore, in the first embodiment of FIG. 69, the third signal is output in response to each repetition of three repetitions of one unit of the first signal (one high level period and one low level period). In contrast, in another modification of FIG. 71, the first repetition in three repetitions of one unit of the first signal (one high level period and one low level period) is performed. And the third signal is output in response to each of the second and third repetitions. Furthermore, in the first embodiment of FIG. 69, a third signal relating to one piece of third information is output in response to each repetition of three repetitions of one unit of the first signal. On the other hand, in another modified example of FIG. 71, a third signal related to one piece of third information is output corresponding to two of the second and third repetitions in three repetitions of one unit of the first signal. It is different in that it has become.

  In another modification of FIG. 71, the slot machine 1 performs three times (medals) of square waves for one unit (consisting of one High level and one Low level) of the medal insertion signal output from the first signal line. The medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line during the first period from the rise of the square wave of one unit of each repetition in the repetition of the (specified number of insertions). Further, the slot machine 1 performs the first period (not shown in FIG. 71) corresponding to the first repetition of the medal insertion signal in which the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. The third signal is not output from the second signal line, and the first period corresponding to the second repetition and the first period corresponding to the third repetition of the medal insertion signal in which the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. The ID information signal is output from the second signal line during the period. In another modification of FIG. 71, the first period is a period from the rise of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal to the fall of the square wave. Note that the first period in another modification of FIG. 71 corresponds to the “first period” of the present invention.

  Further, the slot machine 1 repeats each repetition in the repetition of one unit (one High level and one Low level) square wave of the medal payout signal output from the second signal line for the number of medal payouts. During the second period from the rise of the square wave for one unit, the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line. In addition, the slot machine 1 performs the second period (not shown in FIG. 71) corresponding to the first repetition of the medal payout signal in which the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line. The fourth signal is not output from the first signal line, and the ratio information signal is output from the first signal line in the second period corresponding to the second repetition of the medal payout signal in which the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line. It is configured to be output. In another modification of FIG. 71, the second period is a period from the rise of the square wave for one unit in the medal payout signal to the fall of the square wave. Note that the second period in the other modification of FIG. 71 corresponds to the “second period” of the present invention.

  For example, when the player inserts three specified medals and operates the start switch 19, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed from time T1 to time T2, and the first medal insertion is performed. Is output from the first signal line. During the first period from the rise of the square wave for one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the first medal insertion signal to the fall of the square wave, the second signal and the third signal are output from the second signal line. No signal is output.

  Subsequently, from time T2 to time T3, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion is output from the first signal line. . Further, the external output signal control means 119 controls the external centralized terminal board during the first period from time T2 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the second medal insertion signal) to time TD1. By sequentially supplying drive signals corresponding to the respective bit values of a plurality of bits constituting the first half of the ID information from the terminal having the terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i to the relay coil 59-12, The first half of the ID information signal output from the second signal line to a hall computer or the like is generated. The first half of the ID information signal is output from the second signal line during the first period from time T2 to time TD1 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  Subsequently, from time T3 to time T4, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion is output from the first signal line. . Further, the external output signal control means 119 controls the external centralized terminal board during the first period from time T3 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal insertion signal corresponding to the third medal insertion signal) to time TD2. By sequentially supplying drive signals corresponding to the respective bit values of a plurality of bits constituting the latter half of the ID information from the terminal of terminal number “2” of the input connector 59i of terminal 59 to the relay coil 59-12, The latter half of the ID information signal output from the second signal line to a hall computer or the like is generated. The latter half of the ID information signal is output from the second signal line during the first period from time T3 to time TD2 when the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line.

  In the game, when two medals are paid out by winning the middle cherries (see FIG. 8), the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed from time T5 to time T6, corresponding to the first medal payout. A square wave of one unit of the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line. In the second period from the rise of the square wave for one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the first medal payout signal to the fall of the square wave, the first signal and the fourth signal are output from the first signal line. No signal is output.

  Subsequently, from time T6 to time T7, the same processing as in FIG. 69 is performed, and a square wave of one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the second medal payout signal is output from the second signal line. . In addition, the external output signal control unit 119 controls the external centralized terminal board during the second period from time T6 (the rising timing of the square wave of one unit of the medal payout signal corresponding to the second medal payout signal) to time TC1. The drive signal corresponding to each bit value of a plurality of bits constituting the ratio information is sequentially supplied from the terminal of the terminal number “1” of the input connector 59i of terminal 59 to the relay coil 59-11, whereby the first signal A ratio information signal is output from the line to a hall computer or the like. This ratio information signal is output from the first signal line during the second period from time T6 to time TC1 when the medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line.

  According to another modification of FIG. 71, the ratio information signal as the fourth signal is output using the first signal line for outputting the medal insertion signal, and the medal payout signal is output. The second information line is used to output an ID information signal as a third signal, so that more types of signals than the number of signal lines can be transmitted.

  According to another modification of FIG. 71, the medal payout signal and the ID information signal are not output in the first period corresponding to the first medal insertion of the medal insertion signal, and the second medal insertion signal and the third medal insertion signal are not output. In the first period corresponding to each of the sheets, a medal payout signal is not output, but an ID information signal is output. Also, in the second period of the medal payout signal corresponding to the first medal payout, the medal insertion signal and the ratio information signal are not output, and in the second period of the medal payout signal corresponding to the second medal payout, the medal insertion is performed. No signal is output, but a ratio information signal is output. Therefore, the hall computer or the like determines the length of time from the fall of the last square wave of the medal insertion signal to the rise of the first square wave of the medal payout signal, and the time length of the medal insertion signal from the fall of the last square wave of the medal payout signal. Considering that the time length until the rise of the first square wave is longer than the time length from the fall of the square wave to the rise of the next square wave in each of one medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal, A predetermined time after the high level period of both the signal line and the second signal line cannot be detected (this time is determined from the falling of a square wave in each of one medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal to the next square). Medal payout from the falling edge of the last square wave of the medal insertion signal, which is longer than the time until the wave rises Signal line after a time length shorter than the time length from the falling edge of the last square wave of the medal payout signal to the rising edge of the first square wave of the medal insertion signal) or more. Is detected, the output signal of the first signal line is a medal insertion signal and the output signal of the second signal line is an ID information signal. When the High level period is detected, it can be determined that the output signal of the second signal line is a medal payout signal and the output signal of the first signal line is a ratio information signal.

  In FIGS. 69 and 70, the 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 periods have different time lengths, but may be the same. However, the time length of these periods may be determined in consideration of the amount of transmission data, or may be the same without considering the amount of transmission data.

  In FIGS. 69 and 70, the 1-1 period is a period from the rise of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal to the fall of the square wave, and is a 1-2 period, a 1-3 period. Each period is defined as a period from the rise of a square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal to a time before the fall of the square wave. The 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period May be the entire period of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal or a part of the period from the rising edge of the square wave for one unit.

  For example, the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period are respectively defined as a square wave for the first unit of the medal insertion signal, a square wave for the second unit, and The period from the rising to the falling of the first unit square wave (the entire period of the high level for one unit) may be used. In this case, it is determined that the signal output from the second signal line during the period other than the High level period of the medal insertion signal is the second signal, and the signal output from the second signal line during the period when the medal insertion signal is at the High level. Can be determined to be the third signal. Therefore, a hall computer or the like can determine whether the signal is the second signal or the third signal only by detecting whether or not the medal insertion signal is in the high level period.

  In FIG. 71, the first period is a period from the rise of the square wave of one unit in the medal insertion signal to the fall of the square wave, and the second period is the period of the square wave of one unit in the medal payout signal. The first period is defined as the entire period of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal or a part of the period from the rising edge of the square wave for one unit in the medal insertion signal. Alternatively, the second period may be the entire period of the square wave for one unit in the medal payout signal or a part of the period from the rising edge of the square wave for one unit.

  Further, in FIG. 71, the first period for transmitting the first half of the ID information signal and the first period for transmitting the second half of the ID information signal have the same time length, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the time length of the first period for transmitting the first half of the ID information signal may be different from the time length of the first period for transmitting the second half of the ID information signal.

  In FIG. 69, the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line during the 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 periods from the rise of the square wave constituting the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output from the second signal line during the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following may be used. In the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period from the fall of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line. The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal may be output from the second signal line during the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period. Further, even if the output information includes model ID information assigned to each game machine model, component ID information assigned to the medal selector 48, the hopper unit 43, and the like for each game machine, etc. Good.

  In FIG. 70, if the type of the third information is different depending on the time length from the rising of the third signal in the identification period to the first rising of the medal insertion signal as the first signal after the rising of the third signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, from the fall of the third signal in the identification period to the first rise of the medal insertion signal as the first signal after the fall of the third signal. The type of the third information may be changed according to the time length of the third information.

  In FIG. 70, the medal payout signal is output from the second signal line during the 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 periods from the rise of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output from the second signal line without being output, and the time is longer than the rising time of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. During the discrimination period from A minutes before to the rise of the square wave, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output from the second signal line. According to the type of information related to the third signal, the signal from the rising of the third signal in the identification period to the first rising of the medal insertion signal after the rising of the third signal is determined. While being thus made different between length, it is not limited thereto, but may be as follows, for example. For example, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line during the 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 periods from the fall of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. , The ID information signal, the ratio information signal, and the error information signal are output from the second signal line, and the time A is shorter than the rising or falling time of the square wave constituting the medal insertion signal on the first signal line. In the discrimination period from before to the rise or fall of the square wave, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the ID signal, the ratio information signal, and the error as the third signal are output from the second signal line. An information signal is output, and the third signal rises or falls during the identification period according to the type of the third information related to the third signal. Time length to the first rising or falling of the rising or medal signal after falling a may be made different. Further, for example, a period from the rise of the square wave constituting the medal insertion signal on the first signal line to time a is defined as an identification period. In this identification period, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, An ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal are output from the two signal lines as a third signal. In the 1-1 period, the 1-2 period, and the 1-3 period, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the 1-2 signal period is not output. An ID information signal, a ratio information signal, and an error information signal are output, and medals are inserted before the rising or falling of the third signal in the identification period according to the type of the third information related to the third signal. Standing signal It may be made different length of time until the rise or fall of the third signal in the identification period from rising. Also in this case, the hall computer or the like can use this time length to determine which type of the third signal the third signal is, and use the second signal line for the medal payout signal. Then, it becomes possible to transmit a plurality of types of third signals other than the medal payout signal.

  In FIG. 71, during the first period from the rise of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the second signal forming the medal insertion signal is not output. An ID information signal is output from the second signal line during the first period from the rising edge of the third square wave, and the second period from the rising edge of the square wave constituting the medal payout signal on the second signal line. The medal insertion signal is not output from the first signal line, and the ratio information signal is output from the first signal line in the second period from the rising of the second square wave forming the medal payout signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following may be used. During the first period from the fall of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal on the first signal line, the medal payout signal is not output from the second signal line, and the second and third squares forming the medal insertion signal are not output. An ID information signal is output from the second signal line during a first period from the fall of the wave. Even if the medal insertion signal is not output from the signal line, and the ratio information signal is output from the first signal line in the second period from the fall of the second square wave constituting the medal payout signal, Good.

  Further, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the number of types of the third information relating to the third signal is the same as the number of repetitions of the square wave forming the medal insertion signal as the first signal, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the number may be equal to or less than the number of repetitions of the square wave forming the first signal.

  Also, in FIG. 69, as shown in FIG. 71, the third signal of one type of the third information is transmitted by three square waves or two square waves constituting the medal insertion signal as the first signal. Is also good. In FIG. 71, as shown in FIG. 69, the type of the third information transmitted corresponding to the second square wave and the third square wave constituting the medal insertion signal as the first signal is made different. You may do so. Further, in FIG. 71, the slot machine 1 is configured so that a third signal can be output from the second signal line corresponding to each of a plurality of square waves forming the medal insertion signal as the first signal, The fourth signal may be output from the first signal line in correspondence with each of a plurality of square waves constituting the medal payout signal as the above. In this case, the hall computer may set the length of the High level period to, for example, The first signal or the fourth signal is used to determine whether the signal is the second signal or the third signal.

  Further, in FIG. 70, one type of third information is transmitted by each of three square waves constituting a medal insertion signal of a specified number of medals, but the present invention is not limited to this. The following may be used. For example, a third signal related to one type of the third information is transmitted in response to a medal insertion signal relating to the insertion of a specified number of medals, and a third signal corresponding to a next medal insertion signal relating to the insertion of a specified number of medals is transmitted. A third signal relating to another type of information is transmitted, and the rise or fall of the first square wave from the time A before the rise or fall of the first square wave constituting the medal insertion signal The period from the rising edge or the falling edge of the third signal in the identification period to the rising edge or the falling edge of the first square wave forming the medal insertion signal, according to the type of the third information. The type of the third information related to the third signal may be changed according to the time length. Also in this case, the hall computer or the like can use this time length to determine which type of the third signal the third signal is, and use the second signal line for the medal payout signal. As a result, it becomes possible to transmit third signals corresponding to each of a plurality of types of third information other than the medal payout signal.

  In addition, one third signal (M signal consisting of N units corresponding to one unit corresponding to each of the M bits constituting the third information) transmitting M bits constituting the third information is, for example, The output may be made to correspond to one (N square waves) of the medal insertion signal relating to the insertion of the specified number N of medals, or may be output corresponding to the L number of medal insertion signals relating to the insertion of the specified number N of medals. The output may be made in accordance with the minute (N × L square waves).

  Further, the first information relating to the first signal output from the first signal line and the second information relating to the second signal output from the second signal line only need to be not output at the same time. An example of what kind of information can be used for the information related to the output signal of the first signal line and the information related to the output signal of the second signal line, including the contents described above, will be described. However, the following ID information may be the ID information of the main CPU 61, the ID information of the main board 63, or the like, the model ID information assigned to each model of the gaming machine, the medal selector 48 or the hopper unit 43. For example, there may be component ID information or the like assigned to each gaming machine. In addition, it is not limited to the following examples.

  For example, the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to medal insertion, and the second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line is information related to medal payout. The third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line may be at least one of ID information, ratio information, and error information.

  Further, the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to medal payout, and the second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line is information related to medal insertion. The third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line may be at least one of ID information, ratio information, and error information. For example, when the third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line is of three types, ie, ID information, ratio information, and error information, the number of tokens to be paid out is 1, 2, or 9 (see FIG. 8). ), When the number of tokens to be paid is one, the third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line corresponding to the square wave for one unit of the token payout signal is set as ID information, and the token payout is performed. When the number is two, the third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line corresponding to the square wave of the first unit of the medal payout signal is set as ID information, and the second one unit is used. The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line in correspondence with the square wave is defined as ratio information. When the number of tokens to be paid out is nine, it corresponds to the square wave of the first unit of the token payout signal. The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line is The third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line corresponding to the second square wave of one unit is set as ratio information and the third square wave of one unit is set as information. Then, the third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line may be used as the error information. Further, a third signal of one type of third information may be transmitted corresponding to a plurality of square waves of one unit of the medal payout signal.

  The first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to medal insertion, and the fourth information related to the fourth signal output from the first signal line includes ID information, ratio information, The second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line, which is a part of the error information, is the information related to the medal payout, and the third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line. The information may be other than the fourth information among the ID information, the ratio information, and the error information.

  The first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to medal insertion, and the fourth information related to the fourth signal output from the first signal line includes ID information, ratio information, The second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line, which is a part of the error information, is information related to medal insertion, and the third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line. The information may be other than the fourth information among the ID information, the ratio information, and the error information.

  Further, the first information relating to the first signal output from the first signal line is information relating to an error during the game detected by the specific event detecting means 112, and the second information output from the second signal line corresponds to the first information. The related second information is information related to the setting change performed by operating the setting change key switch 50b or the setting change button 50c, and the third information related to the third signal output from the second signal line is the ID information and the ratio. It may be at least one of information and error information. Since the front door 5 is closed during the game and the front door 5 is opened during the setting change, the information relating to the error during the game and the information relating to the setting change may occur simultaneously. Absent.

  Further, the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to the setting change, and the second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line is related to an error during the game. The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line, which is information, may be at least one of ID information, ratio information, and error information.

  Further, the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to an error during the game, and the fourth information related to the fourth signal output from the first signal line is ID information, Information, which is a part of the error information, and the second information relating to the second signal output from the second signal line is information relating to the setting change, and relating to the third signal output from the second signal line. The third information may be ID information, ratio information, and error information other than the fourth information.

  The first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line is information related to the setting change, and the fourth information related to the fourth signal output from the first signal line includes ID information, ratio information, The second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line, which is a part of the error information, is information related to an error during the game and relates to the third signal output from the second signal line. The third information may be ID information, ratio information, and error information other than the fourth information.

  Further, the third signal according to the third information and the fourth signal according to the fourth information may be encrypted or may not be encrypted.

<Second embodiment>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the second embodiment is an example in which the gaming machine of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine that is a ball-and-ball gaming machine, and the basic electrical configuration and operation are substantially the same as those of the above-described first embodiment. In the following, points different from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the case of the pachinko gaming machine, unlike the slot machine 1 described above, the predetermined counting standard and the setting counting standard are expressed by the number of awarded balls of balls or the game (play) time. The second embodiment is greatly different from the first embodiment in that the predetermined tallying criterion and the set tallying criterion are set to the number of prize balls.

  The game information storage means 653 in the present embodiment is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and sets the predetermined number of prize balls, which is a predetermined total criterion, to 6000 and the set number of prize balls M, which is the predetermined total criterion, to 60,000. The data shown in FIG. 72 is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the game information storage means 653, a 2-byte storage area for storing 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 (FIG. 72). (Corresponding to the number of prize balls of P1 to P10 in the middle), and a 3-byte storage area for storing the accumulated value of the number of prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 ( A 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of prize balls after installation or after RWM clear (corresponding to the total number of prize balls in FIG. 72). ) Is formed. Here, the number of award balls is the number of paid game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area for storing the number of bonus prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 ( 72 corresponds to the number of bonus prize balls of P1 to P10 in FIG. 72), and stores the accumulated value of the number of bonus prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. A storage area of 3 bytes (corresponding to the number of bonus prize balls of the cumulative PS in FIG. 72) and a storage area of 4 bytes for storing the total number of bonus prize balls after installation or after RWM clear (FIG. 72) (Corresponding to the total number of special prize balls). Here, the bonus prize ball count is the sum of the number of paid-out balls due to a prize in the ordinary electric auditorium, the number of paid-out balls due to a prize in the special electric auditorium A, and the number of paid-out balls due to a prize in the special electric auditorium B. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 72, two-byte storage for storing the number of special electric accessory prize balls for the number of 6,000 prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 in the game information storage means 653. The area (corresponding to the number of special motor-operated character prize balls of P1 to P10 in FIG. 72), the accumulation of the number of special motor-operated character prize balls for the number of 6000 prize balls in each of the first to tenth period P1 to P10 A 3-byte storage area for storing the value (corresponding to the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the cumulative PS in FIG. 72) and the total total number of special electric accessory prize balls after installation or after RWM clear are stored. A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of special electric accessory prize balls in FIG. 72) is formed. Here, the special electric auditors' prize ball count is the sum of the number of payout balls by winning the special electric auditors' character A and the number of payout balls by winning the special electric auditors' character B.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the game information storage means 653 stores, in the last 60,000 prize balls, the ratio of the bonuses (the percentage of the cumulative PS award spheres with respect to the cumulative PS prize balls in FIG. Ratio (referred to as “60000 prize ball number”)), a 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the cumulative PS bonus item ratio in FIG. 72), and the bonus item ratio in the total number of award balls (FIG. 72). A 1-byte storage area for storing the percentage of the total cumulative number of bonus prize balls with respect to the total cumulative number of prize balls: referred to as a "principal ratio (cumulative)" (the total cumulative role in FIG. 72). (Corresponding to the product ratio).

  As shown in FIG. 72, the game information storage means 653 stores, in the most recent 60000 prize ball count, the special electric auditors' duty ratio (the percentage of the cumulative electric PS special prize ball count of the cumulative PS in FIG. 72 with respect to the cumulative PS prize ball count). : 1 byte storage area (corresponding to the special electric accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 72) for storing the "special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize ball count)" Special electric auditors ratio (percentage of the total number of special electric auditors' prize balls in FIG. 72 with respect to the total number of prize balls: referred to as “special electric auditors ratio (cumulative)”). A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total special electric accessory ratio in FIG. 72) is formed.

  The size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  However, with respect to the number of award balls, the number of accessory award balls, and the number of special electric accessory award balls, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 has a ring buffer structure. From the first term P1 to the tenth term P10 as in the second term P2, the third term P3, ..., the ninth term P9, the tenth term P10, the first term P1, the second term P2, ... The ring pointer is updated every 6000 prize balls while repeating in order, and the value of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer is cleared and then updated as needed for each prize ball. In addition, regarding the number of award balls, the number of accessory award balls, and the number of special electric accessory award balls, the cumulative PS and the total total are updated every 6000 award balls.

  The accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the special electric auditors ratio (cumulative) are calculated for each 6000 prize balls.

  The number of prize balls, the number of special prize balls, and the number of special electric prize balls correspond to the tabulated items, and the ratio of the special prize (60000 prize spheres) and the ratio of the special electric prize (60000 prize balls) , The accessory ratio (total), and the special electric accessory ratio (total) correspond to the calculation items.

  The information on the cumulative PS and the total number of prize balls, the number of bonus prize balls, and the number of special electric bonus prize balls are totaled when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, every 6000 prize balls). It is. The number of prize balls, the number of bonus prize balls, and the number of special electric bonus prize balls in each period from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are set even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, each prize Sphere) This is the information to be tabulated. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 6000 prize balls, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  The accessory ratio (60,000 prize balls), the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the special electric auditors ratio (cumulative) are calculation items as described above. It is displayed on a ratio display (corresponding to “display means”) 69 in a predetermined order. Note that, in the present embodiment, the first order is the special electric accessory ratio (the number of 60000 award balls), the second is the special agent ratio (the number of 60000 award balls), and the third is the special electric accessory ratio (the cumulative total). ) The fourth is the accessory ratio (cumulative).

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ratio of the bonus (60000 prize balls), the ratio of the special motor-operated bonus (60000 prize balls), the ratio of the bonus (cumulative), and the ratio of the special motor-operated bonus (cumulative) In the embodiment, the calculation items are calculated (for each 6000 prize balls). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, every 6000 prize balls), the ratio of the bonus (60000 prize balls), the ratio of the special electric bonus (60000 prize balls), and the ratio of the bonus (cumulative) ) And the special electric accessory ratio (cumulative) are in a specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in this embodiment, the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 is reversed). ). In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 60000 prize balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, although the specific order is reverse to the predetermined order, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific order is the same as the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69. Is also good.

  Subsequently, a tallying process of tallying the storage contents of the game information storage unit 653 shown in FIG.

  The tallying unit 114a calculates, for each prize ball, the values of the number of prize balls, the number of bonus prize balls, and the number of special electric bonus prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10. By updating the value of the number of prize balls in the period, the value of the number of prize balls, the number of bonus prize balls, and the number of special electric bonus prize balls are updated.

  Then, the counting means 114a calculates the accumulation of the number of prize balls from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 for every 6000 prize balls, and stores the accumulated value in the number of prize balls of the cumulative PS. Calculate the accumulation of the number of bonus prize balls from P1 to the tenth term P10, store the accumulated value in the number of bonus prize balls of the accumulated PS, and special electric auditory prize from the first term P1 to the tenth term P10. The accumulation of the number of balls is calculated and the accumulated value is stored in the special electric auditors' prize number of accumulated PS. Further, the counting means 114a adds the prize ball number of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of prize balls for every 6000 prize balls. By updating the number of prize balls and adding the number of bonus prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of bonus prize balls, the total cumulative bonus prize is obtained. By updating the number of balls and adding the number of special electric accessory prize balls in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 to the total number of special electric auditors prize balls, Update the number of special electric role prize balls.

  The counting means 114a updates the ring pointer after updating the storage content of the game information storage means 653 for performing the prize ball count after the last update of the ring pointer reaches 6000 and performing the prize ball count for each 6000 prize ball count, The values of the number of prize balls, the number of bonus prize balls, and the number of special electric bonus prize balls in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from the first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are cleared to zero. Updating of the ring pointer is like the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The ninth period P9, the tenth period P10, the first period P1, the second period P2,. The first period P1 to the tenth period P10 are sequentially repeated.

  Subsequently, a calculation process performed by the calculation unit 114b in the present embodiment based on the storage content of FIG. 72 will be described.

  The calculating means 114b of FIG. 6 is based on the storage content of FIG. 72, and the ratio of the bonus (60000 award balls), the ratio of the special motor-operated bonus (60000 award balls), the ratio of the bonus (cumulative), and the special motor combination The object ratio (cumulative) is calculated for each 6000 prize balls.

  In the calculation of the accessory ratio (number of 60,000 award balls), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of bonus award balls of the cumulative PS to the number of award balls of the cumulative PS is calculated, and the special electric auditors ratio (60000 award balls) is calculated. In the calculation of (number), a ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of special electric accessory prize balls of the cumulative PS to the number of prize balls of the cumulative PS is calculated. In calculating the bonus ratio (cumulative), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative bonus prize ball count to the total cumulative prize ball count is calculated, and the special motor-operated bonus ratio (cumulative) is calculated. Then, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total number of special electric accessory prize balls to the total number of prize balls is calculated. The calculation of each ratio in the second embodiment uses the same method as the ratio calculation described in the first embodiment.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 in the present embodiment performs display control for performing display based on FIG. 73 and display control for performing display based on FIG.

  First, the display contents of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 73 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, and the percentage (%) is 50 (%).

  On the ratio display 69, (1) special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), (2) special agent ratio (60000 prize balls), (3) special electric accessory ratio (cumulative) , And (4) the accessory ratio (cumulative), which are displayed according to the display method shown in FIG. However, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 73 indicate the display order. The display mode according to the display method of FIG. 73 corresponds to the first lighting mode (normal display mode), and the display control corresponds to normal control.

  More specifically, in the (1) special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize ball count), the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69 indicate “special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls)”. Abbreviation "6b" indicating the number of special motorized accessory prize balls in the last 20000 prize balls in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69 (FIG. 72). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the special electric accessory prize ball number of the cumulative PS to the prize ball number (the cumulative PS prize ball number of FIG. 72) in the latest 60000 prize ball numbers are displayed. .

  Further, in the (2) accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), the high-order two-digit (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69 indicates the “accessories ratio (60000 prize balls)”. “7b” is displayed, and the last two digits (the tens place and the ones place) of the segment of the ratio display 69 are the number of the bonus prize balls in the last 60000 prize balls (the number of the bonus prize balls of the cumulative PS in FIG. 72). ), The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of awarded balls (the number of awarded balls in the cumulative PS in FIG. 72) in the latest 60000 awarded ball numbers are displayed.

  Further, in the (3) special electric accessory ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation “6c” indicating “special electric accessory ratio (cumulative)” in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69. Is displayed in the lower two digits (tenth place and ones place) segment of the ratio display 69. The special electric accessory prize ball number in the total prize ball number (the total special electric accessory prize ball in FIG. 72). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number to the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls (the total number of prize balls in FIG. 72) are displayed.

  Further, in the (4) accessory ratio (cumulative), the abbreviation "7c" indicating "accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio indicator 69. In the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, the total number of the award balls in the total number of the award balls in the total number of award balls (the total number of the award balls in the total of FIG. 72). The lower two digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the number of prize balls (the total number of prize balls in FIG. 72) are displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), the segment cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (the tens place and the ones place) of the ratio indicator 69. Similarly, 99 (%) is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69.

  However, (1) Special electric accessory ratio (60000 award balls), (2) Special agent ratio (60000 award balls), (3) Special electric accessory ratio (total), (4) Special agent ratio (total) In FIG. 73), the hundreds of lit places DP are lit as shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 73, but the tens, tens and ones lit places are respectively lit. DP is not turned on. The boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment is easily grasped by turning on the hundreds of possible locations DP.

  These (1) special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), (2) special agent ratio (60000 prize balls), (3) special electric accessory ratio (total), (4) accessory ratio (total) ) Are displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) the accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (3) the special electric accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (4) the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed for a certain period.

  These displays (1) to (4) are sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, when the number of prize balls that have been predetermined does not reach the number of prize balls, the upper two digits of the segment are displayed in a blinking manner, and when each ratio is equal to or more than the prescribed value of the ratio predetermined for each. Indicates that the lower two digits of the segment are blinking.

  However, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again, regardless of the display items at the time when the power is turned off, (1) display is performed from the special electric auditors ratio (60000 prize balls). For example, if the power is turned off while the power is turned off during the display of (2) the accessory ratio (60000 prize balls), (1) the special electric accessory ratio (60000 prize balls) is displayed. Is done.

  Note that the abbreviations are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 73.

  Note that the display method shown in FIG. 13 is used when an RWM error occurs.

  Comparing the display contents in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 13 with the display contents in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 73, the special control when an RWM error occurs in FIG. 13 turns on in the normal control in FIG. All the illuminable places DP of the thousands, tens, and ones digits of the ratio indicator 69 without the mark are illuminated. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the RWM error has occurred by the display of the ratio display 69.

  In the second embodiment, a sensor (corresponding to “gaming medium detection means”) detects passage of a sphere (corresponding to “gaming medium”) at a specific location, and the tallying unit 114a detects a sphere passing through the specific location. Is performed based on that is detected by the sensor, and the payout control unit 110 performs payout processing based on the fact that the sensor detects a ball that has passed a specific location. The tallying by the tallying unit 114a is performed after the ball that has passed through the specific location is detected by the sensor and before the payout processing by the payout control unit 110. Accordingly, the tallying by the tallying unit 114a is performed after the ball that has passed through the specific portion is detected by the sensor and before the payout processing by the payout control unit 110. Even if a power interruption occurs in the middle of the payout process, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the initialization process is already performed, and the counting process is already performed. For this reason, even in the case where a power interruption occurs during the processing of dispensing a ball and the power is then restored when the power is restored, the number of bullets dispensed can be accurately counted.

  In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls is used as the predetermined tallying criterion or the setting tallying criterion. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of firing spheres may be used.

  The relationship between the signal output from the first signal line and the signal output from the second signal line described in the first embodiment and its modifications is described for the pachinko gaming machine, which is a ball game machine in the second embodiment. Can be applied. For example, it is assumed that the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line and the second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line are information that does not occur at the same time, and output from the second signal line. The third information related to the third signal to be performed may be one or more types of information other than the first information and the second information. Further, it is assumed that the first information related to the first signal output from the first signal line and the second information related to the second signal output from the second signal line are information that does not occur at the same time, and output from the second signal line. The third information related to the third signal is one or more types of information other than the first information and the second information, and the fourth information related to the fourth signal output from the first signal line is the first information. It may be one or more types of information other than the information, the second information, and the third information. In this case, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment and its modifications can be obtained.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and various changes other than those described above can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  In the above-described embodiment and the modified example, when the RWM error occurs, the full lighting display in which all the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 are turned on is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of transition, at the time of setting confirmation, or the like, all of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 may be turned on for a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to inspect whether or not a portion of the ratio display 69 related to the lightable portion including the lightable portion is out of order.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, a plurality of total items and a plurality of operation items have been described. However, the present invention has been modified to use a part of the plurality of total items and the plurality of operation items described in each embodiment. Alternatively, a modification may be made so that another total item or multiple operation item is added to all or a part of the plural total items or plural operation items described in each embodiment. Further, specific numerical values such as the predetermined tallying criterion and the set tallying criterion described in each embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and can be appropriately changed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine called a parrot combining a slot machine and a pachinko machine. When the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a pachinko ball as a game medium may be employed. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a video game by executing a computer program.

  Further, instead of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R in the first embodiment, an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT is used, and a plurality of symbols are sequentially displayed on the image display device. You may comprise. Also, the number of rotating reels may be two or more, and may be set to an optimal number as appropriate according to the game mode.

  The data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 6 can be read out from the main control board 63 by performing a specific process. The game information stored in the game information storage means 653 in FIG. 6 can be externally confirmed on a display device such as the credit display 45 or the liquid crystal display 27. The RWM 65 shown in FIGS. 3 and 6 has a structure in which data is retained without being erased even when the power of the housing 3 is turned off. Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 in FIG. 6 has a structure in which the data is not erased by an external operation. In addition, if it is determined based on the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 6 that there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, the game may be stopped or the number of balls may be restricted. Is also possible.

  The present invention can be widely applied to gaming machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine and a pachinko gaming machine.

1 ... slot machine (game machine)
59 ... external centralized terminal board 59i ... input connector 59o ... output connector 61 ... main CPU
63: Main control board 119: External output signal control means

Claims (4)

In gaming machines,
Signal generation means for generating a signal to be output to the outside;
A signal output circuit that outputs a signal generated by the signal generation unit to the outside,
The signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal formed of a square wave corresponding to first information, and a second signal formed of a square wave corresponding to second information different from the first information. And a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information,
The signal output circuit outputs a first signal line for outputting the first signal generated corresponding to the first information to the outside, and a second signal generated corresponding to the second information. A second signal line for outputting to the outside,
The gaming machine is
In the first period from the rise or fall of the first signal in the first signal line, the second signal line is configured not to output the second signal,
The third signal generated corresponding to the third information is output from the second signal line in the first period ,
A gaming machine, wherein one of the first information and the second information is information relating to the insertion of a game medium, and the other is information relating to the payout of a game medium . The first signal is configured such that one High level period and one Low level period are defined as one unit with respect to the number of game media inserted or paid out, and the signal related to the one unit is repeated a plurality of times from the first signal line. It is configured to output
The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line is a different type of information between an m-th time in the plurality of repetitions and an n-th time different from the m-th time. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein In gaming machines,
Signal generation means for generating a signal to be output to the outside;
A signal output circuit that outputs a signal generated by the signal generation unit to the outside;
With
The signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal formed of a square wave corresponding to first information, and a second signal formed of a square wave corresponding to second information different from the first information. And a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information,
The signal output circuit outputs a first signal line for outputting the first signal generated corresponding to the first information to the outside, and a second signal generated corresponding to the second information. A second signal line for outputting to the outside,
The gaming machine is
In the first period from the rise or fall of the first signal in the first signal line, the second signal line is configured not to output the second signal,
The third signal generated corresponding to the third information is output from the second signal line in the first period,
The signal generation unit further generates, as the signal, a fourth signal formed of a square wave corresponding to fourth information different from any of the first information, the second information, and the third information. ,
The gaming machine is
In the second period from the rise or fall of the second signal in the second signal line, the first signal line is configured not to be output from the first signal line,
Yu TECHNICAL machine you characterized in that said fourth signal generated in response to the fourth information is configured to be output from the first signal line in the second period. In gaming machines,
Signal generation means for generating a signal to be output to the outside;
A signal output circuit that outputs a signal generated by the signal generation unit to the outside;
With
The signal generating means includes, as the signal, a first signal formed of a square wave corresponding to first information, and a second signal formed of a square wave corresponding to second information different from the first information. And a third signal composed of a square wave corresponding to third information different from any of the first information and the second information,
The signal output circuit outputs a first signal line for outputting the first signal generated corresponding to the first information to the outside, and a second signal generated corresponding to the second information. A second signal line for outputting to the outside,
The gaming machine is
In the first period from the rise or fall of the first signal in the first signal line, the second signal line is configured not to output the second signal,
The third signal generated corresponding to the third information is output from the second signal line in the first period,
The gaming machine is
The third signal can be output from the second signal line a predetermined time before the rising or falling of the first signal in the first signal line,
The third information relating to the third signal output from the second signal line is of a different type depending on the time length from the rise or fall of the third signal to the rise or fall of the first signal. Yu Technical machine shall be the feature that it is of information.

Images